Chevrolet 1999 Astro Specifications

Chevrolet 1999 Astro Specifications
The 2003 Chevrolet Astro Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ...........................
I-!
Front Seats ...............................................
1-2
Rear Seats ...............................................
1-7
1-13
Safety Belts .............................................
.......................................
1-35
Child Restraints
Air
Bag
System
.......................................
1-62
............................
1-71
Restraint
System
Check
Features and Controls .....................................
2-1
2-2
Keys ........................................................
....................................... 2-7
Doors
and
Locks
2-16
Windows .................................................
............................
2-18
Theft-Deterrent Systems
........... 2-19
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
2-32
Mirrors ....................................................
.............................
2-34
[email protected]
Transmitter
Storage Areas
.........................................
2-38
3-1
Instrument Panel . ...........................................
Instrument Panel Overview ..........................
3-2
......................................
3-18
Climate Controls
WarningLights.Gagesand
Indicators
......... 3-23
3-38
Audio System(s) .......................................
Driving Your Vehicle .......................................
4-1
YourDriving,theRoad, and Your Vehicle
........ 4-2
Towing
...................................................
4-29
Service and Appearance Care ..........................
5-1
Service .....................................................
5-3
5-5
Fuel .........................................................
............... 5-11
CheckingThingsUnder
the Hood
All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-52
Rear
Axle
...............................................
5-53
...............................................
5-54
Front Axle
....................................
5-55
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-62
......................................................
5-63
Tires
.....................................
5-83
Appearance
Care
5-91
Vehicle Identification .................................
5-92
Electrical System ......................................
5-99
Capacities and Specifications .....................
NormalMaintenanceReplacement Parts ...... 5-101
Maintenance Schedule .....................................
6-1
Maintenance
Schedule
................................
6-2
Customer Assistance Information ....................
7-1
Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ...........................
7-10
Index ................................................................
1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name
CHEVY ASTRO are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name ”General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. C2310 A First Edition
II
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual frombeginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do
this, it will help you learn about thefeatures and controls
for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures
and words worktogether to explainthings.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/19/02
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,’’
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
You will find a number of safety cautions in thisbook.
We use a box and the word
CAUTION to tell you about
things thatcould hurt you if YOU were to ignore the
warning.
L
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
I
1
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
...
Ill
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by yourwarranty, and it could becostly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid thedamage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
A
LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTS TO
PROTECT
OCCUPANT
DONOTTWISTSAFETY
BELT WHENAlTACHING
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
MOVE SEAT
FULLY
REARWARD
SECURE
CHILD SEAT
PULL BELT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
I
COMPLETELY
rHEN SECURE
CHILD SEAT
\\I/'
POWER
WINDOW
u,
-
LIGHTING
MASTER
SWITCH 0
\
TURN
SIGNALS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
K I D COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAlTERY
*&:@
\!$!
/a
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
LAMPS
Pf
ENGINE
COOLANT cc
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
BRAKE
I-1
COOLANT
FAN
(a)
OWNERS
MANUAL
DO NOT INSTALL A
'ORWARD-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
LAMPS
***o
0.0
ea.
$0
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE W
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
b
(@)
SERVICE
MANUAL
V
Model Reference
This manual covers these models:
Cargo Van
vi
Passenger Van
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................
1-2
Manual Seats ................................................
1-2
1-3
Power Seat ...................................................
Manual Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1.4
Head Restraints ............................................. 1.5
Seatback Latches ........................................... 1.6
Rear Seats ....................................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-7
Bench Seat .................................................. 1-11
Bucket Seats ...............................................
1-12
Safety Belts ................................................... 1-13
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-13
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 1-17
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................. 1-18
Driver Position ..............................................
1.18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-26
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1.27
Center Passenger Position ............................. 1.27
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. -1-29
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ...................... 1.32
Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1-34
Child Restraints ............................................. 1-35
Older Children .............................................. 1-35
.......1.38
Infants
and
Young
Children ..........
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1.44
Where to Put the Restraint .............................
1-47
Top Strap .................................................... 1-48
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-50
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................
1-52
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
1-54
the LATCH System ....................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ............................ 1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position ............................................
1-57
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
-1-59
Front Seat Position ...................................
Air Bag System ..............................................
1-62
...............
.....1-64
Where
Are
the Air
Bags?
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-66
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-67
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-67
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ....................................... 1.68
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1.69
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ........................... 1.70
Restraint System Check ................................. -1-71
Checking
Your
Restraint Systems ...
.....1-71
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................ 1-71
1-1
Front Seats
The bucket seats can be
adjusted forward or
rearward using the lever
located under the front
Manual Seats
1
I
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Move the seat adjustment lever toward the ouboard side
of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you
want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat
with your body, to make sure that the seat is locked
into place.
Power Seat
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be controls
located on the inboard side of the driver’s seat.
To raise or lower the front of the seat cushion, raise or
lower the lever located toward the front of the vehicle.
To raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion, raise
or lower the lever located toward the rear of the vehicle.
To move the entire seat backwards, forward, or up or
down, move the center knob.
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a knob
located on the inboard side of the driver’s and
passenger’s bucket seats.
Turn the knob toward the front of the vehicle to increase
lumbar support. Turn the knob toward the rear of the
vehicle to decrease lumbar support.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
There is a lever located on the inside of the seat to
adjust the seatback.
You can adjust the
seatback by lifting the
lever and leaning back.
Release the lever to
lock the seatback where
you want it. Pull up on the
lever, lean forward and
the seatback will go to an
upright position.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
1-4
Head Restraints
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can't do their job
when you're reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can't do its job because it
won't be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, notat your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicleis in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in theseat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-5
Seatback Latches
The seatback lever is
located on the right rear
of your seat.
After the latch has been released, push the seatback
toward the front of the vehicle until it locks into place.
To raise the seatback, unlock the seatback latch
by pushing up on the lever while pushing down on the
upper edge of the seatback. Move the seatback into
the upright position. Make sure the seatback is locked
whe t is back in the upright position.
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
0
RELEASE
1-6
To fold your non-touring
bench seatback forward,
pull up on the latch release
lever while pulling the
seatback toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
2. If you have a safety
belt guide on your
seat, pull the safety
belt all the way
out through the guide.
Removing the Rear Seats
To remove the rear seats, do the following:
1. If you are removing the
center seat, remove
the right lap-shoulder
belt. To do this, press
SEAT
REMOVAL
the tip of a key into
the release hole of the
safety belt attachment
while pulling up on
I INSERT KEY
safety
the
belt.
3. To store the safety belt while the second row bench
seat is removed, pull the belt out and put both
buckles in the passenger’s side rear storage bin.
Route the belt out of the forward edge of the
storage bin. Close the cover to retain the belt.
4. Pull up on the seatback latch on the right rear of
the seat. Push the seatback down until it locks
into place.
1-7
5. Lift up on the left and the right seat release levers
at the same time. The latches are near the floor on
the rear legs of the seat.
1-8
6. Lift up on the rear of the seat to remove the seat
assembly from the rear latch pins. Then, pull back
and lift the seat out of the vehicle.
Your seat release latch lever is operated with
a two-stage mechanism. To fully release the
latch, two levels of lift effort will be required.
First, a low effort to overcome the first stage and
then a moderate effort to fully release the latch.
Replacing the Rear Seats
1. Lower the seat into position. Make sure the front
retainers are hooked onto the anchor pins.
2. Pull the seat down to latch the rear retainers.
Make sure the seat is locked in by pulling up
and down on the seat.
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-9
3. To raise the seatback, do the following:
3.1. Unlock the seatback latch by pulling up on
the latch release lever at the right rear of the
seat, while pushing down on the upper
edge of the seatback.
3.2. Move the seatback into the upright position.
Make sure the seatback is locked when it is
back in the upright position.
If you are replacing the center seat, connect the right
lap-shoulder belt to the attachment on the seat cushion.
If you have a safety belt guide on your seat, pull the
belt through the guide before reattaching the
lap-shoulder belt to the side of the seat. The release
hole should be facing outward.
1-10
If you installed the safety belt withthe release hole facing
inward (toward the seat), slide the plastic cover up so you
can seethe buckle. Disconnect the seat belt.Slide the
cover back downand reinstall the belt correctly.
Asafety --It that _ _ impropc
routed,not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash.The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
Bench Seat
Each bench seat can carry up to three passengers.
They can also be removed to increase storage space.
The optional bench seats come with moveable armrests,
individual reclining seatbacks, adjustable headrests
and a fold-down center armrest console.
Only the rear bench seat can be adjusted forward
or rearward using the lever at the front of the seat.
Move the seat adjustment
lever located at the front
of the seat toward the
passenger’s side to
unlock it. Slide the seat
to where you want it.
Then release the lever
and try to move the seat
with your body, to make
sure the seat is locked
into place.
The center bench seat has a pivoting right armrest.
To adjust your seatback, pull up on the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat cushion.
1-11
If your vehicle has the
optional touring package,
your vehicle will have
a center console. To raise
or lower the center
console, press the button
located between the
beverage holders. Sit in
the center seating position
only when the console
is in an upright and
locked position.
Bucket Seats
For details about headrests, see Head Restraints
on page 1-5.
Your vehicle may have rear bucket seats with an
adjustment release bar located under the front of the
seats. These seats can be adjusted forward or rearward
with the release bar. Pull the release bar up to release
the seat bottom. Slide the seat where you want it
and then let go of the release bar. Then try to move the
seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
1-12
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
r-+do with safety belts.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected fromit.
You can be seriously injured or killed.In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
it is extremely dangerous to ridein a C N ~ G
area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.Do not
allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-26.
1-13
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles.
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-14
Sic-1
'I! uo au0aUlos ]nd
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-16
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does,
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-17
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an
excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-35
or lnfants and Young Children on page 1-38. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-18
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 1-34.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-19
ShoulderBeltHeightAdjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To move
down,
it push
it in at
the
top
of the
arrows
and move the height adjuster to the desired position.
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to
your shoulder
1-20
Q: What's wrong with this?
You can be seriously hurt if your slI,ulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-21
Q: What's wrong with this?
'I I canbeseriousinjured
i OUL --elt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would bethere, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-22
Q: What’s wrong with this?
1
..
You can be seriously injured j o u r b e l l ,oes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Q: What’s wrong with this?
feu canbe se IUS injure f you wear
?
shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver orspleen.
L
L
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Q: What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured by a twisted beltl
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-25
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-26
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-18.
The rightfront passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt - except for onething.
If you everpull the lap portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go backall the way and
start again.
If your vehicle has rear bench seats, someone can sit
in the center positions.
1-27
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it
the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-34.
Make surethe release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quicklyif
you ever had to.
1-28
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
These positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to
wear one properly.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-29
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-34.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so that you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-30
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips,just touching thethighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the pelvic bones.
And you’d be less likely to slide
under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply
force at your abdomen. Phis
could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body
are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-31
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,
you can get it from any GM dealer.
This feature will provide added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown booster seats and for
small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide better positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
To provide added safety belt comfort for children who
have outgrown child restraints and booster seats and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side
of the seatback.
1-32
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-29.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.
1-34
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
belts?
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shouider beit can provide. The shouider belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap
belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching
the top of the thighs. It should never be worn
over the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-35
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the childis so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provides.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-32.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-36
I
I
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulderpart is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-37
Infants and Young Children
Except Cargo Vans
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle's
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
I
People should never holda baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn't weigh
much - until a crash. During a crash a baby will
it.
become so heavy it is not possible to hold
CAUTION:
(Continued)
I
1-38
I
I
-
For example, in a crash atonly 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who areup against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neitherthe vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-39
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-40
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is
weak andits head weighsso much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant
in a
rear-facing seat settlesinto the restraint,so the
crash forces canbe distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured
in
appropriate infant restraints.
The Ddy st.
re of a young -.1ild is quite
unlike that ofan adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on
thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a
crash, the belt would apply force on a body
area that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
.-
-.-
Children who are L against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-41
__
. born infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighsso much
compared with the rest its
of body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed
across the strongest part of an infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. Infants always should
be restrained in appropriate infant restraints.
in
However, infants, who should be restrained
a rear-facing child restraint, cannot ride safely
in this vehicle.
1-42
~
~
~
The body structure of a young cf
I is qi !
unlike that ofan adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones arestill so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body
area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much - until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb.(1 10 kg) force on
a person’s arms.
1-43
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-44
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child's body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G)
is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
1-45
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps,two hip straps and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide,shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-46
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system
in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chanceof personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Except Cargo Vans
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a
booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in the fro ’ passenger seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. Thisis because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraintin
a rear seat.
You may securea forward-facing child restraint
in the right frontseat, but before youdo, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
it as
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint
in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no
child is in it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-47
Cargo Vans
Top Strap
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle. Here’s why:
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it towork, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap
being anchored. Others require the top strap always
to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires
that the top strap be anchored, don’t use the restraint
unless it is anchored properly.
A child in a r - r-fa 1g child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to the inflating air bag.Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraint is suitable for
your child, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no
child is in it.
I -48
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-49
Top Strap Anchor Location
If your vehicle is a cargo van, the anchoring point for
a top strap is located at the rear of the seat cushion
on the right front passsenger's seat spacer bar.
Anchor the top strap through the two slots.
Cargo Van Models
1-50
If your vehicle is apassenger van with rear seats,
it is
recommended that you securea child restraint witha top
strap onlyin the outboard positions of the second row.
Bucket Seats: An anchoring point is located below
the rear of the seat cushion on the spacer bar.
Anchor the top strap through the two slots on the bar.
Passenger Van Bucket Seats
Bench Seats: An anchor bracket is located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the top rear of the seat leg
for each outboard seating position of the second row.
For the third row, an anchor bracket is located at
the rear of the seat cushion near the top rear of the
seat leg for the right outboard seating position.
If you have adjustable head restraints, raise the head
restraint and route the top strap under it.
Passenger Van Bench Seat (Second row)
The third row has one anchor for the passenger side
outboard position only.
1-51
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
If you have a passenger van it has the LATCH system.
It has two sets of anchors (A) in the second row of
seats. In a seven passenger van, the anchors are
located in each of the bucket seats in the second row.
In an eight passenger van, the anchors are located
in the driver and passenger side seating positions of the
second row bench seat.
1-52
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.
n
With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached t~
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect the childcorrectly. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraintis
properly installed using the anchoragepoints,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System”, “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position”, “Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position”, or “Securing a Child
Restraint in a Right Front Seat Position” in the
Index for information on howto secure a child
restraint in your vehicle.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to the
anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 7-48.Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-52.
1-54
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-48 if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
1-55
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt
while you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint,
you may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6 . Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-56
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position
Bench Seat
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-52.
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
See Top Strapon page 1-48 if the child restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
1-57
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on thechild restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-58
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-52.
.
Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put
a rear facing child restr; ’ t in this seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killedif the front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
If your vehicle is a passenger
van, always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear
seat. If your vehicleis a cargo van, do not use
a rear-facing child restraint inthis vehicle.
If a forward-facing child restraintis suitable
for your child, always move the passenger seat
as far back as it will go.
L
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
1-59
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap on
page 1-48, if the child restraint has one. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See “Seats” in the Index.
..
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safely belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-60
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
Your vehicle has air bags - one air bag for the driver
and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But these
air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
You ca.. Je severely injured or k i L - . . I a crash
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt- even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
CAUTION:
1-62
(Continued)
LI.cLI..gthings inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts, but don’t replacethem.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal andnear frontal
crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,
or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, air bags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly - whether or not there’s an air
bag for that person.
All bags ,,,,late with ,;eat force, faster rllan
the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an
inflating air bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with air bags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Anl,,le
who is up against, or very close .a,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neitherthe
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the parts of this manual called “Older
Children” and “Infants and Young Children.”
1-63
Where Are the Air Bags?
AIR
BAG
United States
Canada
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on
page 3-26 for more information.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-64
16 something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The
path of an
inflating air bagmust be kept clear. Don’t
put
anything between an occupantand an air bag,
and don’t attach or
put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near anyother air bag
covering.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-65
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.”
If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t
move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph
(14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however,
with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes
something that will move or deform, such as a parked
car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not
designed to infalte in rollovers, rear impacts, or in
many side impacts because inflation would not help the
occupant.
1-66
In any particular crash, noonecan
saywhetheranair
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact
and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In an impactof sufficient severity, theair bag sensing
is in a crash.The sensing
system detects that the vehicle
system triggers a release
of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag,
and related
hardware areall part of the air bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the
right front passenger.
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the
protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But air bags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety
belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions.
1-67
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may noteven realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module -the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel
for the right frontpassenger’s bag -will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but nottoo hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Airbag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-68
l
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get outas soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but can’t get outof the vehicle afteran air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by openinga
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
e
Air bagsare designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’llneed some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system willinclude air bag modules and
possibly other parts.The service manual for your
vehicle coversthe need to replace other parts.
e
Your vehicle is equipped with acrash sensing and
diagnostic module, whichrecords information about
the airbag system. The module records information
about the readinessof the system, whenthe system
commands airbag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment.The module also records
speed, engine rpm,brake and throttle data.
e
Let onlyqualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper servicecan mean that your air bag
system won’t workproperly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace
the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the
air bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break
the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Informqtion on page 7-11.
For up to
10 minutes after the ignition key
is
turned off and the battery
is disconnected, an
air bag canstill inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with
yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for isyou
qualified to do
so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-69
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of
Q: If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?
A: As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s
basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep
the air bags from working properly in a crash.
1-70
the vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate anyof the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions aboutthis,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbersand
addresses for Customer Assistance arein Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page
7-2
Restraint System Check
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
A crash can damage the restraint systemsin
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person usingit,
resulting in serious injury or even deathin a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
1-71
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time
of the collision.
1-72
If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the
seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.
Section 2
Features and controls
Keys ............................................................... 2.2
RemoteKeylessEntrySystem
.
-2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .......... -2-5
Doors and Locks ............................................. 2-7
Door Locks .................................................... 2.7
Front Doors ................................................... 2.8
Power Door Locks .......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2.9
Leaving Your Vehicle ...................................
-2-10
Sliding Side Door ......................................... -2-10
Rear Doors .................................................
-2-13
Windows ........................................................ 2.16
Manual Windows .......................................... 2.16
Power Windows ........................................... -2-17
Sun Visors ................................................... 2.17
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2.18
[email protected] 2.18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2.19
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 2.19
........
...................2.19
Ignition
Positions
~
=
~
=
= = = =
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2.21
Engine Coolant Heater .................................. 2.22
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2.23
All-Wheel Drive ............................................ 2.26
Parking Brake .............................................. 2.26
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-27
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................. 2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-30
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-30
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-31
Mirrors ........................................................... 2.32
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ -2-32
Outside Manual Mirrors .................................. 2.32
Outside Power Mirrors ................................... 2.32
Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2.33
[email protected] ................................... 2.34
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ...........2.35
Storage Areas ................................................ 2.38
Overhead Console ........................................ 2.39
Luggage Carrier ........................................... 2.44
Convenience Net .......................................... 2.45
2-1
Keys
m m
!aving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
This vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and door locks.
It will fit with either side up.
The bar-coded tag has a code on it that tells your
dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.
Keep this tag in a safe place. If you lose your keys,
you’ll be able to have new ones made easily using
this tag.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features that
can help prevent theft. Youcan have a lot of trouble
getting into your vehicleif you ever lock your keys
inside. Youmay even have to damage your vehicle to
get in. So be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
When a new vehicleis delivered, the dealer provides the
owner witha pair of identical keys and a bar-coded tag.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehiclehas this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about
3 feet ( 4 m) up to 30 feet (9 m)
away usingthe remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
UNLOCK: When you
press UNLOCK, the
driver’s doorwill unlock
automatically, the parking
lamps will flash and the
interior lights will go on.
LOCK: Press LOCK to lock all the doors. Press LOCK
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
REAR 2X: When you press the REAR button twice
within three seconds to unlock the rear hatch or cargo
doors, the parking lamps will flash and the interior lights
will go on. If the engine is running, the automatic
transmission must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for
the REAR 2X button to operate.
& (Panic Alarm): When this button is pressed,
the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps
will flash for up to 30 seconds. This can be turned off by
pressing the panic button again, waiting for 30 seconds,
or starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
If you press UNLOCK again within three seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery, do the following:
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notices When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1. Insert a thin object like a dime to separate the
bottom of the transmitter from the top.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with a new one,
making sure the positive (+) side of the battery is
facing down. Use one [email protected] three-volt,
type CR2032, or equivalent battery.
3. Snap the top and bottom together.
2-6
Doors and Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Door 'lock--
To unlock your door from the outside, use your key
or remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
For more information, see Remote Keyless Entry
System on page 2-4.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a dooris locked,
the handle won't open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren't locked.So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock the front doors and
sliding side door from the
inside, slide the manual
lock levers down. To unlock
the frontdoors and the
sliding side door from the
inside, slide the manual
lock levers up. When the
red mark onthe lock
lever is visible, the door
is unlocked.
2-7
Front Doors
Power Door Locks
To open a front door from the outside, grasp the handle
and pull the door open.
To open a front door from
the inside, pull the lever
toward you and push
the door open.
If your vehicle has power
door locks, press the
power door lock switch
located on the door panel
to lock or unlock all the
doors at once.
The power door lock switch will lock or unlock the
rear hatch and Dutch doors. See “Hatch Release’’ in
Rear Doors on page 2- 13.
When a door is locked, the inside door handle will not
open the door. This will help stop a door from being
accidentally opened.
2-8
If the sliding door is open and you press the power door
lock switch, the sliding door will not lock immediately.
After you close the door,the system comes on and locks
the sliding door in about five seconds.
When the key is in the ignition and the power door lock
switch is pressed with a door open, all doors are
locked while the driver’s side door remains unlocked.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto IocWunlock
feature which enables you to program your power
door locks.
Your vehicleleft the factoryprogrammed to have all the
doors lock automatically when
the shift lever is moved out
of PARK (P). All of the doorswill unlock when the shift
lever is moved back into PARK
(P). The following
instructions detail how toprogram your door locks.
To enter the program mode youneed to do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition in OFF. Then, pull back on the
turn signaVmultifunction lever all the way toward you
and hold it while you perform the next step.
2. Turn your key to RUN and OFF twice. Then, with
the key in OFF, release the turn signaVmultifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock
switch lock and unlock.
You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the following four programming
options and follow the instructions. You will have thirty
seconds to begin programming. If you exceed the
thirty second limit, the locks will automatically lock and
unlock to indicate that you have left the program mode.
If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning with
Step 1. You can exit the program mode any time by
turning the ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically
lock and unlock to indicate that you are leaving the
program mode. If the IocWunlock switches are not
pressed while in the programming mode, the auto
IocWunlock setting will not be modified.
2-9
The following is a list of the available programming
oDtions:
0
Sliding Side Door
All doors lock/Only the driver’s door unlocks:
Press the lock side of the power lock switch on
the door panel once and then the unlock side once.
All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
once, and then the unlock side twice.
All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press
the lock side of the power lock switch on the door
panel once, and then the unlock side three times.
0
No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press
the lock sideof the power lock switch on the door
panel twice. This turns off the automatic lock feature.
For more information, see your dealer.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving your vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
2-10
To open the sliding side door, pull the handle toward
the back and slide the door to the rear until it rests inthe
open position.
To close the sliding side door, pull the handle toward
the front and slide the door forward.
Sliding Door Security Lock
n
I
Your vehicle may have
this feature. A sliding
door security lock helps
to prevent young children
or other passengers
from opening the sliding
door using the inside
door handle.
There are two labels on your vehicle to remind you that
you have this feature. One can be seen from the outside
on your sliding door. It is located near the bottom of the
door glass, toward the front of the door. The other label is
located on the front of the sliding door, near the security
door lock.
This feature prevents passengers from opening the
sliding side door from the inside.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the lever all the way up.
I\
2. Close the door.
d
To open the sliding side door while the security lock is
engaged, unlock the door and open it from the outside.
The security door lock is located near the front of the
sliding door.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the sliding door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how the security door lock
works, and how to cancel the lock.
2-1 1
Cancelling the Sliding Door
Security Lock
To cancel the security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
If your vehicle is facing downward on asteep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door does
not slam shut be sure to holdit open until
everyone is clear of the door, and only then
allow it to slowly close.
I
2-12
Rear Doors
If you have the “Dutch Doors”, you must open the hatch
first. See “Hatch Release’’ later in this section.
To open the driver’s side
rear door, pull on the latch
release handle located
on the inside of the door.
To close the rear doors, close the driver’s side door
first. Check to make sure both doors are completely
closed.
The rear doors have a check assembly to keep the
doors from opening beyond 90 degrees.
2-13
To fully open the rear
doors, push in on the
clip and lift the check
assembly up off the
mounting bracket.
Do this on each door. Replace the check assemblies on
the mounting brackets before closing the doors.
It can be dangerous to drive with therear
glass open because carbon monoxide(CO)
gas can come into your vehicle.You can’t see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. If you must drive with the rear
glass open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the rear glass:
Make sure all other windows are shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See ”Climate Controls”
in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See ”Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
2-14
Hatch Release
You can use your key to unlock the hatch and all of
the other doors from the outside. Insert the key into the
hatch release button and turn it counterclockwise.
All of the doors will unlock.
You may also use the keyless entry system described
earlier.
The hatch can be opened or closed without a key if the
door lock system is unlocked.
To open the hatch, unlock it, then press the button and
lift the handle located in the center of the door.
To lock the power lock system from the outside, insert
the key in the hatch release button and turn it clockwise.
All doors will lock.
2-15
Windows
Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows
closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
To operate your manual windows, turn the hand crank
on each door to raise or lower your side door windows.
2-16
Power Windows
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch also has an express-down
feature that allows you to lower the window without
holding the switch. Press the down arrow on the driver’s
window switch marked AUTO briefly to activate the
express-down feature. The express-down feature can
be interrupted at any time by pressing the up arrow
end of the switch. Lightly tap the switch to open
the window slightly.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them from side to side. Your visors
may have an extension that can be pulled out for
additional glare protection.
If you have power windows, the controls are located on
each of the front doors. The driver’s door also has a
switch for the front passenger window. Yourpower
windows will not work unless the ignition is in RUN or
ACCESSORY, or unless retained accessory power
is active. See “Retained Accessory Power” under
Ignition Positions on page 2-19.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Some visors have mirrors built in, with or without lamps.
Just lift the mirror cover on each visor to turn the
lamps on.
2-17
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is a big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
[email protected]
Your vehicle is equipped with the [email protected]
theft-deterrent system.
[email protected] a passive theft-deterrent system. [email protected]
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
2-18
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes, wait
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the
engine. Remember to release the key from STARTas
soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn
the engine off. However, your [email protected] systemis
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by [email protected] at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93.
See your dealer for service.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to five
different positions.
New Vehicle Break-in
C
Nofice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or
slow - for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
e
e
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.See “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
A
A (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio, power windowsand windshield wipers when
the engine is off. To get into ACCESSORY, push in the
key and turn it towardyou. Your steering wheel will
remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key.
2-19
Notice: Don’t operate accessories in the
ACCESSORY position for long periods of time.
Prolonged operation of accessories in the
ACCESSORY position could drain your battery
and prevent you from starting your vehicle.
B (LOCK): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correctkey;
if so, is it all the way in? Ifit is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
2-20
C (OFF): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. Use OFF if you must
have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off
(for example, if your vehicle is being towed).
D (RUN): This is the position for driving.
E (START): This position starts your engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features
on your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes
after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows and overhead console will
work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY
Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF, these
features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or
until a door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or -18°C)’ do this:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, !et go of
the key.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your batteryto
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Fuel Regulator
You have a fuel regulator that shuts the fuel off when
the engine reaches 5,600 rpm.
2-2 1
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this
feature, in very cold
weather, 0°F (-8°C) or
colder, the engine coolant
heater can help. You’ll get
easier starting and better
fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (OOC), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment, near
the power steering fluid reservoir.
2-22
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 1IO-volt AC outlet.
Plugging the cord i..__
_..mgrounc,, ,utlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Don’t leave your vehicle when the enL le is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and movethe shift lever to
PARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in the
Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever - push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into
the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P)on
page 2-29.
2-23
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Damage to your transmission caused by
shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with
the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
stopped.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-28.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Shifti-.J into - __-,e L-Ar while ,-ur eng..je is
“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.
Unless your footis firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engine
is racing.
2-24
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator pedal all the way down. You’ll shift
down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) should be used for normal towing.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when
carrying a heavy load or driving on steep hills.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission
will drive in second gear. You may use this feature
for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you
are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery
road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift selector lever is put in FIRST ( I ) , the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slow enough.
Notice: If your rear wheels won’t turn, don’t try
to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or wereup against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal.
This could overheat and damage the transmission.
Use your brakes or shift intoPARK (P) to hold
your vehicle in position on a hill.
Tow/HauI Mode Button
Q
I
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul button.
The button is located on the end of the column shift
lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing
or hauling a heavy load.
To select the tow/haul mode, press in the button.
The TOW/HAUL light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. To go back to normal operation, press the
button again. The indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster will go out. See Tow/Hau/ Mode Light on
page 3-36 for more information.
2-25
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle.
It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions.
This is normal and is an indication that the all-wheel
drive system is functioning properly.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot.
Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the brake release lever located on the
lower left side of the steering column.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have
to replace them, and you could also damage
other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-31. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-26
Shifting Into Park (P)
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
It can be dangerousto get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
Pull the lever toward you.
2-27
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine F nning
Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous toleave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Don’t leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Move the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-28
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
After you’ve moved the shift lever to PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 2-27.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-23.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may needto have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then,
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-29
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine exhaust can kill.
It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(CO), which you can'tsee or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damagedin a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Repairs weren't done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had
been
modified improperly.
Things tha- Jan -Jrn could tout hot
e: 3ust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things
that can burn.
2-30
is coming into
If you ever suspect exhaust
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out anyCO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift leveris not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you’ve left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the
shift lever
to PARK (P).
I,..ng the e..,ine
with the c....late conL,I
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the fan is at the highest setting. One place
this can happenis a garage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
L
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-37.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Winter Driving’’ in the Index.
2-31
Mirrors
Outside Power Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving.
Press the tab forward (away from you) for day driving.
Pull the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside rearview mirrors so you can see a
little of the side of your vehicle and the area beside
and behind your vehicle, from a comfortable driving
position.
You can fold the mirrors inward before entering a car
wash. Pull the mirrors toward the vehicle. Push the
mirrors back out when finished. After pushing the mirror
out, the adjustment will be maintained.
2-32
Your vehicle may have this feature.
To adjust the outside rearview mirror, move the selector
switch in the middle of the control to L for the driver’s
sidemirror or to R forthe passenger’s side mirror.
Then use the arrows located on the four-way control pad
to move the mirror in the desired direction. To make
sure you do not accidentally move a mirror, return the
selector switch to the middle position (off) after
adjusting the mirrors.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
A convex r....ror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
2-33
[email protected] Transmitter
If your vehicle is equipped with the [email protected]
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
HomeLink,@a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink,@information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-34
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink
Transmitter
Do not use the [email protected] with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original transmitter for usein other vehicles as
well as forfuture [email protected] programming.
It is also
recommended that uponthe sale of the vehicle,the
programmed [email protected] should be erasedfor
security purposes. Refer to “Erasing [email protected]”
or, for assistance,contact HomeLinkO onthe internet at:
www.home1ink.com or bycalling 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are programming.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to park
outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two [email protected]
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the [email protected]
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on [email protected] and thehand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming’’ later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after [email protected] receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
2-35
5. Press and hold the newly-trained [email protected]
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the [email protected] is pressed
and released.
To program the remaining two [email protected],
begin with Step 2 under “Programming [email protected]”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head
unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
2-36
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed [email protected] button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
[email protected] now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two [email protected] buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming [email protected]”
Do not repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough for
[email protected] topick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to “time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming [email protected]’ procedures (regardlessof
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
[email protected]’ with the following:
Continue to press and hold the [email protected] while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by [email protected] Theindicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed
with Step 4 under “Programming [email protected]“to
complete.
Using [email protected]
Press and hold the appropriate [email protected] for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink*
Button
To program a device to [email protected] a [email protected]
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired [email protected]
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the [email protected]
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
[email protected]”
Erasing HomeLinP Buttons
Resetting Defaults
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
To reset [email protected] default settings do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
[email protected] now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming [email protected]”
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the [email protected]
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact [email protected]
at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
[email protected] Button” next.
2-37
Storage Areas
If you have rear storage compartments, pull up on the
lid to open the cover.
Your front storage compartmenVglove box is at the
center of the engine cover. To open the compartment.
press the two tabs together and pull.
2-38
Your vehicle may have this feature.
There is also a mapktorage pocket on the passenger's
side of the engine cover console.
The overhead console includes reading lamps,
a compartment for a garage door opener, a trip
computer, a temperature and compass display, and a
storage compartment for sunglasses.
The reading lamps, trip computer, temperature and
compass display will work whenthe ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY orwhen Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. See "Retained Accessory Power" under lgnition
Positions on page 2- 19.
2-39
Reading Lamps
Installing a Garage Door Opener
Your vehicle may have this feature.
If you have a garage door opener, the front overhead
compartment can be used to conveniently store the
opener.
Press the button near
each lamp to turn the
reading lamps on and off.
1. To install the garage door opener, first open the
compartment door by pressing the latch forward.
2. Peel the protective
backing from the hook
and loop patch.
b
The lamps can also be swiveled to point in the direction
you want.
3. Press it firmly to the back of your garage door
opener, as close to the center of the opener as
possible.
2-40
4. Center the garage door opener activation button
over the console door button and press the opener
firmly into place.
The pegs inside the
compartment door are
used to make sure
the button on the
compartment door will
contact the control
button on the garage
door opener.
6. Now, with the
compartment door
closed, press the
button again to
make sure the
garage door opener
operates properly.
With the garage door opener positioned properly and
the right number of pegs in place, you can press
the button to operate the opener.
5. Add one peg at a time until the garage door opener
operates with the compartment door closed when
you press the button. Adjust the position of the
garage door openerand add or remove pegs
as needed, until the opener operates properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a HomeLinkO
Transmitter. For more information, see HomeLinP
Transmitter on page 2-34.
2-4 1
Driver Information System
\I
COMPTTEMP (CompassTTemperature): This display
provides the outside temperature and one of eight
compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle
is facing.
Before you turn on the ignition and move the vehicle,
the temperature indicated will be the last outside
temperature recorded with the ignition on. If the outside
temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower, the display will
toggle between the word ICE and the current
temperature every eight seconds. This is a warning to
the driver that road conditions may be icy, and that
appropriate precautions should be taken.
Your vehicle may havethis feature. This system displays
the outside air temperature, compass direction and trip
information in the overhead console.
US/MET (United StatedMetric): The US/MET button
allows you to switch the display between the English and
metric system.
MODE: The MODE button can be used to toggle
between three modes of operation: OFF, COMP/TEMP
and TRIP.
2-42
The compass is self-calibrating, so it does not needto be
manually set. However, if C (Calibration) is displayed, the
compass will need to be calibrated. You may alsoplace
the compass in a noncalibrated mode by pressing and
holding the US/MET and MODEbuttons simultaneously
while in the COMPREMP mode. After about10 seconds.
the compass will display C and you can release the
buttons. Drive the vehicle in a complete360" circle three
times at a speed of less than 5 mph (8 km/h), and the
compass will function normally. Once the calibration
is
complete, the display will return to a compass reading.
Variance is the difference between magnetic north
and geographic north. In some areas, the difference
between the two can be great enough to cause false
compass readings.
If this happens, follow these
instructions to set the
variance for your particular location:
4. Press US/MET until your zone number appears on
the display.
5. Press MODE to enter your zone number. Your
variance is now set and the display will return to
the COMPREMP mode.
1. Find your location on the zone map. Record your
zone number.
1
TRIP: Once in the TRIP mode, pressing the MODE
button will take you through the following TRIP functions:
0
AVG ECON (Average Economy): The average
fuel economy since the last reset is displayed.
INST ECON (Instantaneous Economy):
Instantaneous fuel economy for the last second of
driving is displayed.
0
0
0
2. Press and hold both the US/MET and the MODE
buttons while in the COMP/TEMP mode.
3. After five seconds, the compass will acknowledge
the variation mode by displaying the current zone
number. When it does, release both buttons.
RANGE: The display indicates the estimated
distance that can be travelled with the remaining
fuel in the tank, based on the fuel economy for the
last few hours of driving.
FUEL USED: The fuel used since the last reset
is displayed.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): The average
speed since the last reset is displayed.
To reset the trip computer, press the MODE and
US/MET buttons simultaneously for at least two
seconds. All functions will be displayed briefly once the
system is reset. Reset can only be performed in the
AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED modes.
All three modes are reset simultaneously.
2-43
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Luggage Carrier
If you have a luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has side rails and crossrails
attached to the roof to secure cargo.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded. Follow these
guidelines:
Carrying small, heavy loads on the roof is not
recommended.
Tie the load to the side rails. Use the crossrails
only to keep the load from sliding.
The overhead console has a sunglasses storage
compartment.
If you need to carry long items, tie the load to
the side rails. Also tie the load to the bumpers.
Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or
side rails are damaged.
* After moving the crossrails, be sure to tighten all
the slider screws.
For the purpose of wind noise reduction, locate the
front and rear crossrails in line with the two center
supports.
2-44
Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than
200 Ibs. (91 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle. When you carry large things, never
let them hang overthe rear or the sides
of your
vehicle. Load your cargo so that it rests on the
slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.
Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten
it securely to the luggage carrier. Put the main
weight as far forward as you can.
Convenience Net
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocery bags,
in place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-29.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.
2-45
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ............................... 3.2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................ 3-4
Other Warning Devices ................................... 3-5
Horn .............................................................
3-5
Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3-5
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3.6
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 3.12
Interior Lamps ................................
.......3.15
Accessory Power Outlets ............................... 3.16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................ 3.17
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.18
Climate Control System ................................. 3.18
Rear Heating System ...................................
-3-19
Rear Air Conditioning System ......................... 3.20
Rear Climate Control System ......................... 3.21
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3.23
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3.24
Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.25
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.26
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-26
Charging System Light .................................. 3.27
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... -3-28
Brake System Warning Light .......................... 3.28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............. 3.29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
i . 3-39
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3.30
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................ 3.34
Security Light .............................................. -3-35
Service All-Wheel Drive Light ......................... 3.35
Tow/Haul
Mode
Light .........
...................3.36
Check Gages Warning Light ........................... 3-36
Fuel Gage ................................................... 3.36
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................. 3.37
Audio [email protected]) ............................................. 3.38
Setting the Time for Radios with
the Set Button .......................................... 3-38
Setting the Time for Radios with
HR and MN Buttons .................................. 3-38
AM-FM Radio ............................................... 3.39
Radio with CD .............................................. 3-41
..
....
............3.46
Rear
Seat
Audio
(RSA)
................3.47
Theft-Deterrent Feature ...........
Understanding Radio Reception ...................3.50
Care of Your CDs ......................................... 3-50
Care of Your CD Player ................................ 3-50
Fixed Mast Antenna ...................................... 3.50
= =
= .
~
=
=
~
~
~
=
3- 1
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Exterior Lamp Control
Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel
Multifunction Lever
Hazard Warning Flasher Button
Transmission Shift Lever
Ignition Switch
Rear Defogger Button (Option)
Climate Controls
Rear A/C Control (Option)
I. Rear Heater Control (Option)
Y. Rear WasherNViper Switch (Option)
L. Front Ashtray
M. Dome Override Button
N. Hood Release
0. Cigarette Lighter
P. Audio System
Q. Front Storage Compartment
R. Cupholders/Storage Tray
S. Accessory Power Outlets
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher button is located on top of
the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
3-4
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
Press the horn symbol in the middle of the steering
wheel to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering
wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more room when You exit
the
enter
and
vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-5
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
Dane1 cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the driver’s side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn and Lane Change Signals
HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control (Option)
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12.
3-6
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash faster, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-93.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring
for the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher
is used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator
will flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out.
Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly
to make sure they are working.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high to low, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light
located on theinstrument
panel cluster also will
be on.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal
lever to the center position.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in automatic.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear a click.
If your headlamps are in automatic or on low beam,
your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on
as long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator located on the cluster comes on.
Release the lever to return to normal operation.
3-7
Windshield Wipers
For fewer wipes choose a setting closer to LOW.
Use this setting
rain and snow.
- for light
To operate the windshield
wipers turn the band,
locatedOn the multifunction
lever’
Or
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged,
worn
or new
blades
get
blade
inserts.
or
Windshield Washer
6(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with the
MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the windshield wipers start, then let
it go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you
want more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
OFF: Turn the band to turn offthe windshield wipers.
LOW (Low Speed): Turn the band to LOW for
steady wiping at low speed.
HIGH (High Speed): Turn the band to HIGH for
steady wiping at high speed.
DELAY: Turn the band to one of the five delay
settings located between OFF and LOW, to choose
the delayed wiping cycle. The closer the band is
turned to OFF, the shorter the delay will be.
3-8
windshield washer symbol atthe top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, press
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and
then either stop or return to vour preset speed.
In freezing weather, don’t u- - your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.
Rear
Window
WasherNViper
Your vehicle may have this
feature. The rear window
washer'wiper is controHed
byusing the switch located
on the instrument panel,
next to the audio system.
For delay wiping, slide the switch up to the center
position next to the word DELAY on the rear wiper
control. The wiper will cycle every nine seconds.
To wash the window, push in on the switch. Window
washer fluid will continue to spray until the switch
is released. The wiper will continue with three more
wipes and then return to the setting that was chosen
before the lever was pushed.
Move the switch to OFF to turn off the rear window
washer.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the front windshield washer. If the fluid level is low in the
washer bottle, you may not be able to wash your rear
window. If you can wash your windshield, but not
your rear window, check the fluid level.
To turn the wiper on, slide the switch all the way
up to ON.
3-9
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may have this feature. With cruise control,
you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
Cruise con,. _.,an be dang-. DUS where
you can’t drive safelyat a steady speed.
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
needless wheel spinning, and you could
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
I
If yvu leave your cruise control on when you’re
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you don’t want to.You could
be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switchoff until you want to use
cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET
button at the end of the
lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-10
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you setyour cruise control at a desired speed
andthen you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higherspeed:
*
Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the
cruise control switch
from ON to R/A
(Resume/Acclerate) briefly.
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the switch. To increase your
speed in very small amounts, move the switch to
R/A briefly. Each time you do this, your vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep going
faster until you release the switch or apply the brake.
So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch
at R/A.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Press the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
0
To slow down in very small amounts, press the
button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-1 1
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepnessof the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may wantto step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may haveto brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down.Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-12
The exterior lamp control is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
The exterior lamp control has three positions:
Automatic Headlamp System
0
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also dim.
(Off): Turning the control to this position turns off
all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).
%:
(Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
SidemarkerLamps
0
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
0
Instrument Panel Lights
AshtrayLamp
-g-(Headlamps):
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top of
the instrument panel in the defroster grille. Be sure it
is not covered, or the system will be on whenever
the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and
nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and the automatic headlamp systemsso that driving
under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not
affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when thelight sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
3-13
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later
in this section for more information.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To disable the
tone, turn the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel
all the way down. In the automatic mode, the
headlamps turn off once the ignition key is in OFF.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on
at a reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamp control is off.
the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
3-14
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the
last chosen headlamp setting that was used.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
To idle yourvehicle with theDRL off, put the transmission
in PARK (P). The DRLwill stay off until you shift out
of PARK (P).
The thumbwheel for this feature is located to the right of
the exterior lamps control.
The following does not apply to vehicles first sold
in Canada.
(Instrument Panel Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up to brighten the lights or down to dim them.
When necessary, you may turn off the automatic
headlamp system and the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) feature by following the steps below:
Moving the thumbwheel up to the first position will
activate the interior dome lamps.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. After the fourth press of the
button, a chime will sound informing you that
the system is off.
To return to the automatic mode, push the DOME
OVERRIDE button four times within six seconds
(the chime will sound), or turn the ignition to off and
then to RUN again.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will not
come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in.
Entry Lighting
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry
feature.
When a door is opened, the dome lamps will come on
if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position.
When all the doors are closed, the lamps will stay on
for a short period of time and will then go out. If the
DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on.
3-15
Dome Lamps
Accessory Power Outlets
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door,
except with the liftgate glass (if equipped).
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the
thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamp control,
all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
near the exterior lamp control, to set the dome lamps
to come on automatically when a door is opened,
or to remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button
into the in position, the dome lamps will remain off
when a door is open. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again and return it to the
out position. With the button in this position, the dome
lamps will come on when you open a door.
If your vehicle has this feature, you can plug accessory
electrical equipment into an accessory power outlet.
Just pull on the outlet cover to remove it and follow the
proper installation instructions that are included with
any electrical equipment that you install.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity, reading
and glove box lights if they are left on for more than
20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep your
battery from running down.
If the battery run-down protection shuts off the interior
lamps, it may be necessary to do one of the following to
return to normal operation:
Shut off all lamps and close all doors, or
turn the ignition key to RUN.
3-16
The accessory power outlet is located on the
passenger’s side of the front storage compartment.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have
maximum current levels.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the power accessory outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the power accessory plugs.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 25 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your battery.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warran-ly.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter which is
located on the left side of the engine cover console.
To use the lighter, press it in ail the way and let go.
When it’s done heating, it will pop back out by itself.
The front ashtray is located above the passenger’s side
front cupholder. To remove the front ashtray, open it
and gently pull it slightly past its stop.
To remove the ashtray on the sliding door, open it,
then press down on the inside tab and pull it out.
You may have another ashtray on the driver’s sidewall.
Press the right side to turn the ashtray around for use.
Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with
To
remove the ashtray, open it and gently pull it off
your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t
be able to backaway from the heating element when the hinge.
it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging
Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable
the lighter and the heating element.
items into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other
Notice: When using the cigarette lighter as an
accessory power outlet, maximum electrical load
must not exceed 20 amps. Always turn off any
electrical equipment when not in use. Leaving
electrical equipment on for extended periods will
drain your battery.
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.
3-17
Climate Controls
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Climate Control System
(Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half
of the air to the instrument panel outlets and directs
most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air
may be directed toward the windshield.
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
+2
;$’
(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard
outlets (for the side windows) and some air directed to
the windshield.
A/C (Air Conditioning): This setting brings in outside
air, cools and dehumidifies it.
MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): This setting
cools the air the fastest, by recirculating the inside air.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
The right knob can also be usedto select the defrost
mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can be
found later in this section.
@
(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-1 8
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Heating System
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
Your vehicle may have an optional rear heating system
that allows you to adjust the amount of air flowing
into the rear of the vehicle, from the front-seating area.
This feature works with the main climate-control
system in your vehicle.
+3
(Blend): With this setting, the outside air comes
out of both the floor and defroster outlets. Adjust the
temperature knob for warmer or cooler air. The air
conditioning compressor may operate in this setting to
dehumidfy the air.
9(Defrost): This setting operates the defroster.
Most of the air comes out near the windshield, with
some going to the floor outlets and front side windows.
The air conditioning compressor may operate in this
setting to dehumidify the air.
The bi-level setting is useful for cold weather with a
large number of passengers or very humid conditions to
help keep the windshield clear. Use defrost to remove
fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely
cold conditions. The temperature knob should be in the
red area and the fan control toward high.
The thumbwheel for this system is located to the right
of the audio system.
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase or
decrease the amount of heated air sent to the
rear-seating area.
3-19
Rear Air Conditioning System
Directing the Airflow
Your vehicle may have an optional rear air-conditioning
system that allows you to adjust the fan speed in the
rear-seating area, from the front-seating area.
This feature works with the main climate-control system
in your vehicle.
To direct the airflow to the rear-seating area, use the
right knob located on the main climate-control panel.
Generally the upper outlets are used for air conditioning
and the floor outlets are used for heating.
Selecting the Fan Speed
Rear Heat and Rear A/C
8f?
(Fan): Move either thumbwheel on either climate
control panel up or down to HIGH, MED (Medium)
or LOW to increase or decrease the fan speed in the
rear-seating area. Move the thumbwheel to OFF to turn
off the fan.
Setting the Temperature
To increase or decrease the temperature for the entire
vehicle use the center knob located on the main
climate-control panel.
The thumbwheel for this system is located to the right
of the rear-heating system.
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to increase or
decrease the amount of cooled air sent to the
rear-seating area.
3-20
The air-conditioning system on the main climate-control
panel must be turned on to direct cooled air to the
rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the temperature
in the rear of the vehicle will remain at cabin
temperature.
Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of
any objects so that the air inside of your vehicle can
circulate effectively.
For information on how to use the main climate-control
system. For information on ventilation, see “Outlet
Adjustment” listed later in this section.
Press this button to turn
the rear window defogger
on or off. Be sure to
clear as much snow from
the window as possible.
Rear Climate Control System
Rear Window Defogger
Your vehicle may have a rear window defogger that
uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the
rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
The rear window defogger will turn off several minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will run for several more minutes before turning
off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use a razor blade or something else
sharp on the inside of the rear window. If do,
you
you could cut or damage the defogger and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape,
a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid.
3-21
Outlet Adjustment
Operation Tips
1. Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
2. Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
3. Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
Move the thumbwheel in the center of the outlets up or
down to change the direction of airflow.
3-22
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When oneof the warning lights comes on andstays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer can tell you how far yourvehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your odometer is tamper resistant. The digital odometer
will read 999,999 if someone tries to turn it back.
The trip odometer will appear in place of your regular
odometer when you press the TRIP button.
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the TRIP
button. To change back to the regular odometer,
press the TRIP button again.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Air Bag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a tone will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG or the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
air bag sensor, the air bag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see Air Bag System
on page 1-62.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the tone
nor the light will come on.
AIR
BAG
United States
Canada
This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and
it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should
go out. This means the system is ready.
3-26
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
s iced right away.
Charging System Light
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, before starting
the engine, as a check
to show you it is working.
If the air bag readiness
light stays on after you
start your vehicle,it means the air bag system
may not be working properly.
The air bags in
After the engine starts, the light should go out. if it stays
in a crash, or they
your vehicle may not inflate
on or comes on while you are driving, you may have
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoida problem with your charging system. It could indicate a
problem with the generator drive belt, or some other
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
charging
system problem. Have it checked right away.
serviced rightaway if the air bag readiness light
Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
3-27
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on (in the RUN position),
the gage shows your
battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the readings
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
3-28
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
BRAKE
This light should come on
briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you
if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page4-29.
I
You- -)rake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes,
but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See “Brake System Warning Light” earlier in
this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so
it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows
the engine coolant
temperature. If the
gage pointer moves
to the red area, your
engine is too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-31.
3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light
in Canada
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
ds
CHECK
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board DiagnosticsSecond Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE
light comes on and a chime will sound to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work aswell, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than thoseof the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may causethis light to comeon.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it
is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:
e
Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
e
Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.
3-31
If the Light Is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to
your dealer or qualified service center for service.
3-32
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5.Poor fuel quality
will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as
designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. it will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programsto inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not
working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD system readiness, see your dealer or qualified
service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
3-33
Oil Pressure Gage
The oil pressure gage
shows the engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds
per square inch) when the
engine is running.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by
a dangerously low oil level or other problemscausing
low oil pressure.
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can becomeso hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soonas possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
3-34
Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected
oil problems can be costly and
is not covered
by your warranty.
Security Light
Service All-Wheel Drive Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition key to START.
The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light
flashes, the [email protected] System hasentered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see [email protected]
on page 2- 18.
Ifthe light comeson continuously while driving and
stayson, there maybeaproblem
with the [email protected]
System. Your vehicle will not be protected by [email protected],
and you should see your GM dealer.
SERVICE
AWD
This light should come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, as a check to
show you it is working.
The SERVICE AWD light comes on to indicate that
there may be a problem with the drive system and
service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent, which may
prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service technician in
correctly diagnosing a malfunction.
3-35
Tow/HauI Mode Liaht
J
Fuel Gage
This light should come on
when the tow/haul mode
has been selected.
TOW / HAUL
UNLEADED
For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in Towing a
Trailer on page 4-31.
Check Gages Warning Light
CHECK
GAGES
The CHECK GAGES light
will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
3-36
I
United States
Canada
The fuel gage tells you approximately how much fuel
you have remaining when the ignition is on.
When the gage first indicates empty, you still have a
little fuel left, but you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.
Here are things some owners ask about. None of these
indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
0
At the gas station, the gas pump
the gage reads full.
shuts off before
The fuel tank will take either a little more or a little
less fuel to fill up than the gage shows.
0
Low Fuel Warning Light
The LOW FUEL light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-5.
3-37
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time for Radios with
the Set Button
Notice; Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle like a tape player,
CB radio, mobile
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
telephone or two-way radio
- be sure you can add
right SEEK arrow until the correct minute appears on the
what youwant. If you can, it’s very important to it
do
display. Press and hold the left SEEK arrow until the
properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
correct hour appears on the display.
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delphi
Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage
them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the Setting the Time for Radios with
operation of sound equipment that has been added
HR and MN Buttons
improperly.
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
your dealer and be sureto check federal rules
appears on the display. To display the time with the
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time will
Your audio system has been designedto operate easily
be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with it
time-set mode.
first. Find out what youraudio system can doand how to
operate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
-
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play
your audio system even after the ignition is turned off.
See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under
Ignition Positions on page 2- 79.
3-38
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press this knob to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to tune in radio stations.
a SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
a
SCAN D : Press both SCAN arrows. SCAN
will appear on the display. The radio will scan to the
next station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press the RECALL knob or both SCAN
arrows to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
Power: Turn the VOLUME knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch the display between
time and radio station frequency. Time display is
available with the ignition turned off.
Setting Preset Stations
The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to
your favorite stations. You can set up to 21 stations
(seven AM, seven FMI and seven FM2) by performing
the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
3-39
4. Press SET. SET will appear on the display.
Setting the Tone (BassTTreble)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered
pushbutton, the station you set will return.
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or to
decrease bass.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time and by
performing the following steps:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. SET will appear on the display.
3. Press two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two pushbuttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-40
TREB (Treble): Slide this lever up or down to increase
or to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): Turn the control ring behind the
upper knob to move the sound toward the left or the
right speakers.
FADE: Turn the control ring behind the lower knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
Radio with CD
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up
for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control
ring behind the upper knob clockwise to increase
the SCV. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV,
turn the control all the way down.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating
continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
3-41
4
SEEK D : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next station or to the previous station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow
for two seconds until SCAN appears on the display.
The radio will scan to a station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio will seek and scanonly to stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
PSCAN (Preset Scan): Press this button to listen to
each of your favorite stations stored on the pushbuttons
for a few seconds. PSCAN will appear on the display.
Press this button again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to thepreset stations that are in
the selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-42
Setting Preset Stations
The six numberedpushbuttons let you returnto your
favorite stations. You can set upto 18 stations (six AM,
six FM1 andsix FM2) by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM
to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons.
The sound will mute. When it returns, release the
pushbutton. Whenever you press that numbered
pushbutton, the station you set will return and the
tone you selected will be automatically selected
for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to increase or to decrease bass.
BAL (Balance): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
TREB (Treble): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease treble.
If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease
the treble.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Return these knobs to their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this knob to
choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rockand classical
stations.
Playing a Compact Disc
To return thebass and treble tothe manual mode, either
press and release the AUTOTONE button until the
display goes blank or press and
release the BASS or
TREB knobs and turn them until the display goes blank.
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the
disc should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear
on the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the
letters CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages’’ later in this section.
3-43
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to search
for the previous track. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further
Sound is muted in this mode.
2 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to play the
tracks on the disc in random, rather than sequential,
order. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press this
pushbutton again to return to normal play.
3 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to search for the next
track. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more
than once, the disc will advance further. The next track
number will appear on the display. Sound is muted
in this mode.
REV 4 (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
return rapidly to a favorite passage. You will hear
the disc play at high speed while you press this
pushbutton. This allows you to listen and find out
when the disc is at the desired passage. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing.
3-44
FWD 6 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance rapidly within a track. You will hear the disc
play at high speed while you press this pushbutton.
This allows you to listen and find out when the disc is at
the desired passage. Release this pushbutton to
resume playing.
4 SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as NEXT,
and the left arrow is the same as PREV. If the right
or the left arrow is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward or backward
through the disc.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how
long the CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number
will also appear when a new track begins to play.
Press this button again to return to the time display.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when
playing a CD. The CD symbol will still display but
the letters CD will be replaced with either AM, FM1 or
FM2. If the radio is turned off, the disc will stay in
the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. When a disc is playing,
the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear on the
display. If the radio is turned off, the disc will stay in
the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new
disc is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.
If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for
more than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD
back in. The radio will continue playing. When the
ignition is off, press this button to load a CD.
Compact Risc Messages
ERR (Error): If this message appears and the disc
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
*
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the disc should play.
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off of the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-45
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
PWR (Power): Press this button to turn the rear seat
audio system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on. You may operate the
rear seat audio functions even when the primary radio
power is off.
VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume. Push
the knob back into its stored position when you’re
not using it. The upper knob controls the upper
headphone and the lower knob controls the lower
headphone.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the music sources: radio, and CDs. However,the rear
seat passengers can only control the music sources
that the front seat passengers are not listening to.
For example,rear seat passengers maylisten to a CD
through headphones while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
Be awarethat the front seat audio controls always
override the rear seat audio controls.
3-46
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FMI
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening
to the radio, the RSA controller will not switch between
the bands and cannot change the frequency.
Press AM FM to return to listening to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
A
v
SEEK
: While listening to AM, FMI or FM2,
press the up or the down arrow to tune to the next or
to the previous station and stay there. This button
is inactive if the front radio is in use.
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
back to the start of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. The SEEK button is inactive if the
CD mode on the front radio is in use.
To scan preset stations,press and hold SEEK until the
radio goes into scan mode.
The radio will go to a station,
play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next station.
Press either SEEK arrow
again to stop scanning.The
scan functionis inactive if the front radio is in use.
P.SET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers
must be listening to something different for each of
these functions to work:
Press this button to scan through the preset radio
stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
The radio will go to a preset station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
Press this button again to stop scanning.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
[email protected] designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is interrupted.
The [email protected] for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If [email protected]
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When [email protected] activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the
secret code before it will operate.
TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
a tape or CD if loaded. The inactive tape or CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
3-47
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the [email protected] Read
through all nine steps before starting the procedure.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time
and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time.
Hold them down until - - - shows on the display.
Next you will use the secret code number which you
have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3-48
8. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will show REP to let you know
that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm
your secret code.
9. Press AM FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure.
The LED indicator by the volume knob will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2, Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will show SEC, indicating
the radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter
the correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealership.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 pushbuttons at the same time.
Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written
down. The display will show - - -, indicating that the
radio is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature Aftera Power Loss earlier
in this section.
3-49
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Care of Your CDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
3-50
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you canstraighten it out by hand. If the mast
is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you
should
replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Freeway Driving ........................................... 4.20
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4.21
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4.2
Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4.22
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................ 4-6
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-22
Braking .........................................................
4-6
Winter Driving .............................................. 4-24
Steering ........................................................ 4-9
I f You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
.....4.28
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4-11 Snow Ice or
..............................
Passing ....................................................... 4-12
Towing ..............................................
.....4.29
Loss of Control ............................................. 4-13
Towing Your Vehicle .................................. 4.29
Driving at Night ............................................ 4-14
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................... 4.29
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-16
Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4.29
City Driving .................................................. 4-19
Towing a Trailer ........................................... 4.31
4- 1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-13.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the mostpreventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both
city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle
in
front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from
the driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Qrunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
Judgment
0
MuscularCoordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
0
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 Ib
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
I
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at
night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a
BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart, This means that when anyone who
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in
a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person had
not been drinking.
I
Drink...a and then _ _-vin,
-~
--anger
,
s.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgement can be affected by evena small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious - or
even fatal -collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.
.- .
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs
and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (I00km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice,
it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
ANTI LOCK
I
States
I
United
I
I
Canada
If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on. See Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-29.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here’s what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Using Anti-Lock
Steering Tips
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but
this is normal.
Driving on Curves
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Power Steering
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you’ll understand this.
The traction you can getin a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
4-9
Suppose you’resteering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems - steering
and acceleration - have to do their work wherethe tires
meet the road. Addingthe sudden acceleration can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-10
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
Off -Road Recovery
You mayfind that your right wheels have droppedoff the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
4-1 1
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
* Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-12
Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing,
following too closely reduces your areaof vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.Also,
you won’t have adequate spaceif the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable
distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move
so you will be
increasing speed asthe time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that morethan makes up forthe
distance you would lose by dropping back. Andif
something happensto cause youto cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back
again
and wait for another opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’ttrying
to pass youas you pull out to pass theslow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blindspot.
Check your mirrors,glance over your shoulder,and
start yourleft lane changesignal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When
you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your rightlane change signal
and move back into
the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem tobe farther away fromyou
than it really is.)
Try not to pass morethan one vehicle at a time OD
two-lane roads. Reconsiderbefore passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brakelamps are not flashing, itmay
be slowing down orstarting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following
driver to get ahead of you.
Perhaps you can ease a
little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts sayabout what happens
when the three control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
In a skid, adriver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids bytaking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curvecauses tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-13
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Driving at Night
...s
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-14
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
e Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
e Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in
bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night.
But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.
They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they
also make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and
aren’t even aware of it.
4-15
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, theharder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can makeit harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edgeof the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
4-16
Wet brakes can cause -:cider.--. They w -.j’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-17
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water thatis
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
4-18
Driving Through Flowing Water
Flo..,ng or rushingwater cr,tes
strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you
might at a lowwater crossing, your vehicle
can be carried
away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carryaway a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing
water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-63.
City Driving
here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
4-19
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-20
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservior full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re notfresh - such as after a day’s
work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes
you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts
in dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
e
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
e
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
to the recommended pressure?
e
Weather Forecasts:What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-2 1
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such acondition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-22
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
0
Coasting downh.-. .rlEUTL _L(N) or wit
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have
to do all the work of slowing down. Theycould
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then havepoor braking or even none
going down ahill. You could crash. Always have
your engine running and yourvehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
...
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shiftto a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
0
If you don’t shift down, y--. -.-.ces coul, Jet
so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakeson a steep
downhill slope.
I
e
e
I
e
.
.
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gearshelp cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’tswing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane,like a stalled car or an
accident.
You maysee highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples arelong grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-23
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will needto be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-24
Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appearin
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach:
around clumps oftrees, behind buildings or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are onit. Try not to brake while
you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-25
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
* Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-26
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you.You can’t see it or
smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side
of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
4-27
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or otherdamage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheelsas little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above25 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
4-28
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as wellas the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-70.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” following.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page7-6.
Loading Your Vehicle
1
I
GAWR
GWVR
FRT
GAWR RR 1
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
COLD TIRE PRESSURI
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome.
The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground)
and “dolly towing”
(towing yourvehicle with two wheels on
the ground and
two wheels up on a
device known as a “dolly”).
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-29.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
D
O
n n
NERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION^
I
The Certificationflire label in your vehicle will look
similar to this example.
The Certificationflire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your
original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo and tongue weight, if pulling
a trailer.
4-29
TheCertificationnire label also tells you the maximum
weightsfor the front and rearaxles,called
Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
onyourfront and rearaxles,you need to go to a
weighstation and weigh yourvehicle.Yourdealer can
helpyouwiththis.
Be sure to spread outyour load
equally on both
sides
of the
centerline.
Notice: Yourwarrantydoesnotcoverpartsor
componentsthatfailbecause
of overloading.
If youput things inside of yourvehicle - likesuitcases,
tools, packages,oranythingelse - they will goas
fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have tostoporturn
ciiickly qr if there
is
a crash,
they’ll
keep
going.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
- 3 notloadyour
\
e anyheavier
Ian_..e
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
4-30
Things you put inside your vehicle can
srlI6e
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Put things in the cargoarea of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicleso that some of them
are above the tops of the
seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Payload
The Payload Capacity is shown on the CertificationiTire
label. This is the maximum load capacity that your
vehicle can carry. Be sure to include the weight of the
people inside as part of your load. If you added any
accessories or equipment after your vehicle left
the factory, remember to subtract the weight of these
things from the payload. Your dealer can help you
with this.
Trailering Package
There is a load rating which includes the weight of the
vehicle and the trailer it tows. This rating is called
the Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR).
When you weigh your trailer, be sure to include the
weight of everything you put in it. And, remember
to figure the weight of the people inside the vehicle
as part of your load.
Add-on Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
Towing a Trailer
If )“J don’t use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well- or
even at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance
is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer.
See
“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your
vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
4-31
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it aremany time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before you pull
a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
e
e
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 Ibs (900 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 2,000 Ibs (900 kg). You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
4-32
e
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
e
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
e
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts
too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions).
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode
The tow/haul mode is a feature that assists when pulling
a heavy trailer. The purpose of the tow/haul mode is:
e
to reduce the frequency of shifts when pulling a
heavy trailer.
to provide the same shift feel when pulling a heavy
trailer as when the vehicle is unloaded.
to reduce the need to change throttle position when
pulling a heavy trailer.
This feature is turned on or off by pressing a button on
the column shift lever. When the feature is on, a
light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate
that the tow/haul mode has been selected.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 3-36. The tow/haul
mode is automatically turned off each time the vehicle
is started.
The tow/haul mode is most effective when the vehicle
and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the maximum
trailer weight rating for the vehicle.
The tow/haul mode for hauling a heavy trailer is most
useful under the following conditions:
When driving through hilly terrain at speeds below
55 mph (88 km/h).
When driving in low speed or stop and go traffic
below 55 mph (88 km/h).
When driving in parking lots.
Operating in the tow/haul mode when not pulling a
heavy trailer will not cause damage to the vehicle,
but you may experience reduced fuel economy
and undesirable petformance from the engine and
transmission. The tow/haul mode should be used only
when pulling a heavy trailer.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-33
‘he following chart shows how much your trailer can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Two-Wheel Drive (Passenger)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the
maximum trailer weight.
4-34
You can askyour dealer for ourtrailering informationor
advice, or you can write
us at the addresslisted in your
Warranty and Owner AssistanceInformation Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
A
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you maybe able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certificationflire label at the rear edge of the driver’s
door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-29. Then
be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
B
4-35
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg.), be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size. This
equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when you’re driving.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. Dirt and water can, too.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between yourvehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by
the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
4-36
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slackso you canturn with
your rig. Neverallow safety chains to drag onthe ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system, except:
Don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if the
trailer’s brake system will use more than 0.02 cubic
inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master
cylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t work
well. You could even lose your brakes.
Will the trailer parts take 3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of
pressure? If not, the trailer brake system must not
be used with your vehicle.
If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use
copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and
finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
If you
ve a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See “Climate Controls” in
the Index.
~
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-37
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strikesoft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring (included in the optional trailering package).
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-38
des
On
Driving
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can towin DRIVE (D). Youmay want to shift the
transmission to THIRD(3) or, if necessary, alower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/orhilly conditions).
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-3 1.
Youreallyshoul
tot park your vehicle, ith a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-39
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
start your engine,
shift into a gear, and
release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-40
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and
brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual,
and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
If you have the optional trailering package, your vehicle
will have an eight-wire harness, including the center
high-mounted stoplamp battery feed wire. The harness
is stored on the passenger’s side of the vehicle near
the rear wheel well. This harness has a 30 amp battery
feed wire and no connector, and should be wired by
a qualified electrical technician. After choosing an
aftermarket trailer mating connector pair, have the
technician attach one connector to the eight-wire trailer
harness and the otherconnector to the wiring harness
on the trailer. Be sure the wiring harness on the trailer is
taped or strapped to the trailer’s frame rail and leave
it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but
not so loose that it drags on the ground. The eight-wire
harness must be routed out of your vehicle between
the rear door and the floor, with enough of the harness
left on both sides so that the trailer or the body won’t
pull it. If you do not have the optional trailering
package, your vehicle will still have a trailering harness.
The harness is located near the passenger’s side
rear wheel well. It consists of six wires that may be
used by after-market trailer hitch installers.
The technician can use the following color code chart
when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer.
e
Brown: Rear lamps.
e
Yellow: Left stoplamp and turn signal.
Dark Green: Right stoplamp and turn signal.
White (Heavy Gage): Ground.
Light Green: Back-up lamps.
White (Light Gage): Center High-Mounted Stoplamp.
Blue: Auxiliary circuit (eight-wire harness only).
Orange: Fused auxiliary (eight-wire harness only).
Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the
harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t
be damaged.
4-4 1
R
P
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service .......................................................... - 5 - 3
Doing Your Own Service Work ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Fuel ................................................................ 5.5
Gasoline Octane ........................................... -5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................... 5.5
California Fuel ............................................. - 5 6
Additives .......................................................
5.6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................... 5.7
Filling Your Tank ............................................ 5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood .................... 5-1 1
Hood Release .............................................. 5.11
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5.14
Engine Oil ................................................... 5.15
Engine
Cover
.................
....
........5.20
Engine
Air
Cleaner/Filter
.................
........5.24
Automatic Transmission Fluid ...................... 5.25
Engine Coolant ............................................. 5.28
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................. 5.30
Engine Overheating ....................................... 5.31
Cooling System ............................................ 5.33
Engine Fan Noise ......................................... 5.39
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 5.40
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................ 5.41
Brakes ........................................................ 5.42
Battery ........................................................ 5-46
Jump Starting ............................................... 5-47
All-Wheel Drive .............................................. 5-52
Rear Axle ....................................................... 5-53
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-54
Bulb Replacement .......................................... 5-55
Halogen Bulbs ..............................
.....5-55
Headlamps ..................................
.....5-55
Front Turn Signal Lamps ............................... 5-59
Taillamps .................................................... 5-60
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5-61
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-62
Tires .............................................................. 5.63
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-64
Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5-64
When It Is Time for New Tires ....................... 5-66
Buying New Tires ......................................... 5-66
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................... 5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-69
Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-69
Tire Chains .................................................. 5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5.70
Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5.71
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-82
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ............................................ 5.83
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-83
Care of Safety Belts ...................................... 5-86
Weatherstrips ............................................... 5-86
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .................5-86
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-88
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-88
Underbody Maintenance ................................ 5-89
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-89
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...........5-89
Vehicle Identification ...................................... 5-91
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-91
Service Parts Identification Label ..................... 5-91
5-2
Electrical System ............................................ 5.92
Add-on Electrical Equipment ......................... 5-92
Headlamp Wiring .......................................... 5-92
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5-92
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5-92
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................ 5-93
Capacities and Specifications ......................... 3-99
Capacities and Specifications ......................... 5-99
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-101
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering lnformation on
page 7-I 1.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does,
see Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-69 before attempting to do your own
service work.
5-3
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on pi- - ? 6-34.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice’’
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30)
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to
your fuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
may be available in your area to contribute to clean air.
General Motors recommends that you use these
gasolines, particularly if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark
plugs and the performance of the emission control
system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoiine or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.
5-7
Filling Your Tank
Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is behind a hinged door on the
driver’s side of your vehicle.
5-8
d
lf
you
get
fuel
ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happenif your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap
all the way.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it;
if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to
the right.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-86. When filling the tank
do not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after the
pump shuts off.
5-9
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the
right (clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound.
Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction lndicator Lamp
on page 3-30.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction lndicator Lamp” in the
Index.
5-10
F i l h g a Portable Fuel Container
~
Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to
you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of thefill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling iscomplete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
Hood Release
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located inside the vehicle on the
lower driver’s side of the kick panel.
5-11
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the
secondary hood release.
5-12
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in
the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop and remove the hood
prop from the slot in the hood.
Return the prop to
its retainer.
Then just pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-13
A. Windshield Washer Fluid
B.EngineCoolant
C. Engine Oil Dipstick
D. TransmissionDipstick
E. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
F.Engine Oil Fill
G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I. Battery
Engine Oil
It is importanttokeepengine
Checking
Engine
oil at the proper level.
Oil
It’s a good idea to check yourengine oil every time you
getfuel.Inordertoget
an accurate reading,the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring and is located
near the center of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment
Overview
page
on
5-14 for more
information on location.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the Oil pan. If YOU don’t, the oil dipstick
might not showthe actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need to
add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-99.
Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.
5-16
The engine oil fill cap is located on the valve cover in
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. Your vehicle may have a cap with text and a
graphic or just a graphic as shown above. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page5-14 for more
information on location.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symboi indicates that the oii has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you chooseto perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use hasthe
starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have youroil
changed for you, besure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
LOOK
FOR MIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
"C
t
1
3t
+ 2;
- +1
- t 4
- -7
- - 1,
SAE 1OW-30
1
1
1
1
ACCEPTABLE
IF 5W-30 IS NOT
AVAILABLE
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
RECOMMENDED
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50OR ANY OTHER
VlSCOSlN GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
5-17
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle.
You should look for and use only oils which have the
API Starburst symbol and which are also identified
as SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE IOW-30 oil which has the API
Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM [email protected] meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
5-18
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these are true for you, use the short
tripkity maintenance schedule:
Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
e
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
e
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
e
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months - whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months - whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine
under highway conditions will cause engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it
by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-19
Engine Cover
Removing the Engine Cover
and passenger’s side corners.
1. Move both front seats as far back as they will go.
5-20
a,
5
0
a,
+
a
c
U
5. Grasp the top of the heater duct and pull down
gently to remove it.
6. Loosen the two bolts on the engine cover. The bolts
are not supposed to come out
of the cover, only from
the front of the dash.
When removing thecover, be careful not to damage
the instrument panel or the trim.
7. Disconnect the AM radio ground strap.
5-22
Reinstalling the Engine Cover
1. Lift the engine cover into the front of the vehicle
and slide it all the way forward. Make sure the
rubber seal is over the latches.
2. Tighten the two bolts located on the engine cover
to reinstall the cover to the front of the dash.
3. Put the heaterduct over the engine cover studs.
Push up onthe duct gently until it snaps into place.
4. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Reconnect the AM radio ground strap.
8. Grasp the bottom of the cover and slide it rearward.
Then, lift it up and out of the vehicle.
If the seal does not release, use the pull strap on
the driver’s side above the rear mount.
6. Reinstall the engine cover extension by gently
squeezing the sides and sliding it into place.
Make sure all of the fastener clips engage and the
extension fits properly in place. Reinstall and
tighten the two screws.
7. Reinstall the two nuts to secure the extension
in place.
5-23
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to replace the engine air cleanedfilter and the
crankcase ventilation filter. See Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for
more information on location.
3. Change the filter.
4. Snap both clips to secure the engine air
cleaner/filter cover.
Be sure the engine air cleaner/filter cover is correctly
positioned to seal out dust and contaminants that
are harmful to your engine.
Operat...d the engine witt._.re air cleaner/_ _ _ _ er
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans theair, it stops
flame if the engine backfires.If it isn’t there
and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned.
Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff.
Notice: If the air cleanedfilter is off, a backfire
To change the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Unsnap both clips on the cover.
2. Remove the cover.
5-24
can cause a damaging engine fire.And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which willdamage
it. Always have the air cleanedfilter in place
when you’re driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Notices Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
0
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
5-25
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (IOOC), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (1OOC) or more.
If it's colder than 50°F (IOOC), you may have to idle the
engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during
this cold check, you must check the fluid hot before
adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give you a more
accurate reading of the fluid level.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-26
The transmission dipstick has a red handle and is
located near the center of the engine compartment
behind the air cleaner. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Part D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on Daae 6-32.
t
u
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t ovetfi/l.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
[email protected],because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than [email protected]
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-27
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
[email protected] coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only [email protected] life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-3I .
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
[email protected] will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than
[email protected] added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion may result.In addition, the engine coolant
will require change sooner
-at 30,000miles
(50,000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first.
5-28
Damage caused by the use
of coolant other than
[email protected] not covered by your
new vehicle
warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half [email protected] coolant which
won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly
damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater coreand
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at ADD,
or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level
should be up to FULL HOT, or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixtureat the coolant recovery tank.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
r
Lvrl
[email protected]
L
A
The engine coolant tank is
located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side at the
front. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page5-14 for more
information on location.
Turning the radiato ressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant
at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap
- even a
little -when the engine and radiator are hot.
A
5-29
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to mill it.
Radiator Pressure Cap
A
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-33.
5-30
L
The radiator pressure cap
is located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger's side of
the vehicle.
Notice: Your radiator cap is a 15.6 psi (110 kPa)
pressure-type cap and mustbe tightly installed
to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-30.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Sean, ,ram an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engineis
overheated, the liquids init can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
5-31
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See ”Driving on Grades” in Towing a
Trailer on page 4-3 I .
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-32
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped,
pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning’turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools
down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
The coolant level should
be at the ADD mark.
A
If it isn’t, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump
or somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C.Engine Cooling Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t
touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there
is a leak. If you run
the engine,it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine fire, and you could
be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-33
If there seemsto be no leak,start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Nofice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other [email protected]’ is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion may result.In addition, the engine coolant
will require change sooner
- at 30,000miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other than
[email protected] not covered by your new vehicle
warranty.
5-34
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the ADD mark, add a 50/50 of
mixture clean
drinkable wafer, and [email protected] coolant at
the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-28 for more information.
Adding only p.,n
water to your coG...rg
system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water andDEX [email protected]
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
ADD mark, start your vehicle.
5-35
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
1
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap - even a little- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap whenthe
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
5-36
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling system,
including the radiator
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap, but now
push down as you
turn it. Remove
the pressure cap.
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. (Don't press down while turning the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
5-37
3. Fill the radiator with the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-38
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the ADD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the pressure cap off.
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutch
engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper [email protected] mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrow on the pressure cap lines up.
5-39
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with
a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:
Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-32.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for reservoir location.
5-40
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t
clean as well as washer fluid.
0
Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it’s very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank ifit is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your
washer system and paint.
5-41
Brakes
Brake Fluid
DOT3
..............
................
. ........
..
......,...,......
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compadment Overview on
page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir.
5-42
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top o f f your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
It DU have toc ..Iuc.. >rake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
I
MIN
/ \\ \
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to check your brake fluid. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6-30.
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system
checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
5-43
Notice:
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-32.
0
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt
from enterinn the reservoir.
I
With theVI .-..=I kir.- of flui, .n your b.,.re
system, your brakes may not work
well, or they
may not even work
at all.This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-44
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kindof fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See “Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes,
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheei nuts are necessary to heip
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-31.
The brake wear warning
sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well.That could lead to
an accident. Whenyou hear thebrake wear
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-45
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
Te braking system on avehicle is complex. Its many parts
have to be of top quality and workwell together if the
vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was
designed andtested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system -for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new onesput in - be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no
longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between yourfront
and rear brakes can change-for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
[email protected] When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an [email protected]
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-74 for battery location.
5-46
Warnings Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please follow the numbered steps to
do it safely.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode
0
They contain enough electricity to
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-47.
Nofice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pullingit
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-47
1 . Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) and a manual
transmission in NEUTRAL.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory poweroutlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition,
it couldsave your radio!
Nofice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
5-48
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on each
battery.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded.Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enoughwater.
You don’t need to add water to [email protected]
battery installed in your new vehicle. But if
a battery has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water
to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
Fans or other moving engine p-. ts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts, too. And don’t connectthe
negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
5-49
The other end of the negative (-) cable does not
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5-50
Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B.GoodBattery
C. DeadBattery
5-5 1
All-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance lnspections on page 6-30.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
5-52
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
5-53
Front Axle
If the level is below the
bottom of the filler plug
hole, you may need to
add some lubricant.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it.
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on
page 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to
raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and lubricants on page 6-32.
5-54
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Sealed Beam Headlamp
For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs O I J
page 5-6 1.
1. Remove the four
retainer screws and
the retainer.
Halogen Bulbs
Haloc_ I bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
the bulb. You or
can burst if you drop or scratch
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
5-55
2. Pull the connector out
and unplug the lamp.
Composite Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
sidemarkedturn
signal lamp.
3. Plug the new lamp into the connector.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.
5-56
4. Remove the screw
located behind the
corner reflector
to remove the entire
corner reflector.
3. Completely remove the sidemarkedturn signal lamp
by pulling out the assembly anddisconnecting the
sidemarkedturn signal lampsockets from the lamp.
5-57
7. Turn the halogen bulb
counterclockwiseto
remove it from
the assem bly.
5. Remove the remaining three screws, the first one
from the corner reflector pocket and the two
remaining from the composite assembly.
6. Remove the composite assembly.
5-58
8. Install the new bulb into the composite assembly by
turning it clockwise until it is completely tightened.
9. Reinstall the composite assembly by installing and
tightening all of the screws previously removed.
Front Turn Signal Lamps
4. Pull the socket out of the lamp assembly.
5. Pull the bulb from the socket.
1. Remove the two screws at the inside edge of the
parkinghurn signal lamp assembly.
6. Gently push the new bulb into the socket.
2. Remove the lamp assembiy.
7. Put the socket back into the lamp assembiy and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
3. Squeeze the tab on the
side of the lamp socket
while turning the socket
counterclockwise.
8. Put the parkinghurn signal lamp assembly back
into the vehicle and tighten the screws.
5-59
Taillamps
1. Open the rear door.
2. Remove the two
screws from behind
the door.
3. Pull out the taillamp assembly so you can see the
socket.
5-60
4. Press the tab and
turn the socket
counterclockwise to
remove the socket from
the bezel: If the socket
does not have a
tab, turn the socket
counterclockwise
to remove the socket
from the bezel.
Replacement Bulbs
I
I
Exterior Lamp
Halogen Headlamps
Sealed Beam
Halogen Headlamps Composite
I Bulb Number
1
H6054
I9006 (Low Beam)
I
5. Remove the old bulb from the socket and replace it
with a new one.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the taillamp.
5-6 1
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
To replace your windshield
wiper blade inserts, do the
following:
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See "Wiper
Blade Check in At Least Twice a Year on page 6-26 for
more information.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Pinch the two tabs on the wiper arm and slide the
insert out of the blade.
3. Slide the new one in place.
Make sure the tabs are locked into position. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Partson page 5- 10I for
the proper type of replacement blade.
5-62
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GMC Warranty booklet for details.
Poorl! lail - J n e d anc. ..nproy-. ly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
0
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-63
Inflation - Tire Pressure
When to Check
The Certificationnire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. ‘Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Check your tires once a month or more.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right.It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tireoverloading
Bad wear
Badhandling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Badhandling
0
Roughride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-64
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It
Is Time for New Tires on page 5-66 and Wheel
Replacement on page 5-69 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchevwheel wrench to tighten the cable.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71.
The purpose Gf regular rotation is lo achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.
After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rear
inflation pressures as shown onthe CertificationA-ire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel NutTorque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-99.
-
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the part s to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time.The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
patterns shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires
One wayto tell when it’s
time for newtires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear whenyour tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercialtruck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-66
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Mix---J tires could
cause yo-. JOlose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle.See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.
If you use bias-ply tires on yo^. vet,,Je, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash.Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-67
Treadwear
Temperature - A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe
minimum required by law.
Traction - AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-68
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If youneed to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for
your vehicle.
the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling,
-~speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-71 for more
information.
5-69
Used Replacement Wheels
Putting a uscuwheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or howfar it’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class ”S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
on the rear axle tires and tighten them as tightly
as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinningthe wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat,avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowlyto a levelplace. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
Changing a tire can causean injury. The
vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack
and change a tire.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Put the wheel blocksat the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire
on the other side of the vehicle,
at the
opposite end.
5-7 1
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jacking equipment you’ll need is stored by your
vehicle’s rear doors, along the passenger’s side wall.
1. Remove the jack cover by pulling it away from
the side wall and down to release the tabs
securing the top of the cover.
5-72
2. Remove the wheel blocks by turning the top nut
counterclockwise. Remove the nut and washer,
then pull the wheel blocks off the bolt.
3. Push down on the bolt and remove the hooked end
from the slot. Slide the jack toward the front of the
vehicle and lift it from the mounting. Remove
the extension and the ratchet from the pouch.
The ratchet has an
UP side.
It also has a DOWN side.
Your compact spare tire is stored underneath the
rear of your vehicle. You will use the ratchet
and extension to lower the compact spare tire.
5-73
4. Attach the ratchet to the extension, with the DOWN
side facing you. The extension has a socket end
and a flat chisel end.
5. Put the flat end of the extension on an anglethrough
the hole in the rear door frame, abovethe bumper.
Be surethe flat end connects into the hoist shaft.
7. When the tire has
been lowered, tilt the
retainer plate at
the end of the cable
and pull it through
the wheel opening.
8. Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
Notice: To help avoid vehicle damage, do not drive
the vehicle before the cable is restored.
6. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the
compact spare tire to the ground. Keep turning
the ratchet until the spare tire can be pulled out from
under the vehicle.
5-74
Removing the Wheel Covers
YOUwill have to take off the hub caps to reach the
wheel nuts.
B
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), wheel
blocks (B), extension (C) and ratchet (D).
To remove the hub cap from the aluminum wheel, fit the
flat end of the extension into the notch. Then, remove
the center cap.
5-75
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1 . Before you start, block the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
Then put your c o r - x t spare tire near the flat tire.
I
Getting under a vehicle when
it is jacked .I is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips
off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
2. With the DOWN side facing you, turn the
ratchet and socket to loosen all the wheel nuts
counterclockwise. Don’t remove them yet.
3. The jack has a bolt on the end. Attach the socket
end of the extension to the jack bolt.
Lhe jack improperly
Ra.,.ng your vehicle
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
..ICIm
5-76
I
4. Attach the ratchet to the extension with the UP side
facing you.
5. Turn the ratchet clockwise. That will raise the jack
lift head a little.
c
B
Front Position
A. Front Jack Location
B. Jack
C. Ratchet and Extension
6. Position the jack under the vehicle.
5-77
. .
C
B'
Rear Position
A. Rear Jack Location
B. Jack
C. Ratchet and Extension
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the ratchet clockwise.
Make sure the UP mark faces you. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the compact spare tire to fit underneath
the wheel well.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-78
9. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and spare wheel.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from
the places where the wheel attaches
to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rustor dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
loose. Your wheel
do, the nuts might come
could falloff, causing a serious accident.
10. Put on the compact spare tire. Put the nuts on by
hand. Make sure the cone-shaped end is toward
the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub. If a nut can’t be turned
by hand, use the extension and see your dealer as
soon as possible.
-
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-79
12. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
Turn the ratchet
clockwise with the
UP mark facing you.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead
to brake pulsation and rotor
damage. To avoid
expensive brakerepairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torq
specification. See “Capacities and Specifications”
in the index for the
wheel nut torque specification.
13. Remove the wheel blocks.
Notice: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put awheel cover on your
compact spare, you could damage the cover or
the spare.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheelnut
torque specification.
5-80
Stori
J
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
1. Put the flat tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down.
2. Tilt the retainer plate downward and through the
wheel opening. Make sure it is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel. Attach the ratchet,
with the UP side facing you, to the extension.
3. Put the flat end of the extension on an angle
through the hole in the rear door frame, above
the bumper.
The compact spare is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire
as soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-82. See the storage instructions label to
restore your compact spare properly.
4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the ratchevwheel wrench until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. The spare
tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
5. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten
the cable.
Return the jacking equipment to its proper location.
5-81
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course,
it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
5-82
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. Theywon’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you
strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle.
Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in
a closed space. When you use anything from a
container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always
open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
0
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
PaintThinner
Turpentine
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
FabridCarpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
You can get GM - approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-89.
LacquerThinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous - some more than
others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-83
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can
they set.
-
before
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a watedbaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-84
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
Vinyl
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
0
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. Seeyour dealer for
this product.
Interior Plastic Components
Leather
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Glass Surfaces
0
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-89.
Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches. Avoidplacing
decals on the inside rear window, since they may
have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are
used onthe inside of the rear window, an electric
defogger element may be damaged. Anytemporary
license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
5-85
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Keep bel- ;lean
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
-.--I
-’ry.
I
Washing Your Vehicle
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-32.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’sfinish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm orcold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle
well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 5-89. Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
5-86
Finish Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approvedcleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-89.
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If your vehicle has a
“basecoaflclearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more
depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are
non-abrasiveand made for abasecoaflclearcoat
paint finish.
Nofice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may
dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage yourvehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If
necessary, usenon-abrasivecleaners that are marked
safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax,
sap or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-87
Aluminum Wheels
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Nofice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish and tires.
5-88
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust} can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather andatmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms;blotchy, ringlet-shaped discolorations,
and smallirregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Descrbtion
I
Usaae
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
Dolishina cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asPhalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tom.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and finaerprints.
5-89
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
(cont’d)
I
DescriDtion
I
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
I
Usage
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
I Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants, Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
I
I
I Removes swirl marks,
Swirl Remover Polish
I
I
fine scratches and
other light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
5-90
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiDinq necessary.
I
I
I
Description
Wash Wax Concentrate
I
Usage
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
DhosDhate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-32.
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label on the front passenger door frame.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.On this
label is:
yourVIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the
vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
5-91
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t becovered by your warranty.
Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 1-69.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in
the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the
lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases to remain
off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring
checked right away.
5-92
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload,
overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper
linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem
and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed
or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Spare fuses and a fuse puller are located in the
underhood fuse block. You can remove fuses with
the fuse puller. Remember to replace any of the spare
fuses you use, so you will have some if you ever
need them again.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without - like the radio or
cigarette lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
The fuse block is located on the lower portion of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: one is inside
the vehicle and one is in the engine compartment.
5-93
FuseKircuit
Breaker
3
4
5
6
8
FuseKircuit
Breaker
1
2
5-94
Usage
Stop/Turn/Hazard Lamps,
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp,
Anti-Lock Brakes
Radio Accy, Rear Seat
Audio Controls
9
Usage
Courtesy Lamps, Glove Box Lamp,
Dome Reading Lamps, Vanity Mirror
Lamps, Courtesy Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps Relay,
Instrument Panel Cluster
Rear Defogger
Cruise Module, Truck Body Control
Module, Instrument Panel Cluster,
Cruise Control Switch,
Electrochromic Mirror
Power Outlets, DLC,
Subwoofer Amplifier
Crank Circuit Fuse, ParWNeutral
Switch, Starter Enabler Relay
License Plate Lamp, Tailamps,
Parking Lamps, Ashtray Lamp,
Panel Lights, Trailer Taillamps,
Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamps,
Door Switch Illumination, Headlamp
Switch Illumination, Rear Seat
Audio Illumination, Truck Body
Control Module
Fuse/Circuit
Usage
Breaker
10
System
Bag
Air
11
Used
Not
12
L,
M I , M2
Blower Motor, Rear
Air
Conditioning Relay Coil, Front Cont.
Temp. Door Motor, HI Blower Relay.
Defogger Timer Coil
13
Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock
Switches, Dutch Door
Release Module
14
Cluster Illum, Climate Controls,
Chime Module, Radio Illumination,
Rear Heat Switch Illumination, Rear
Wipermasher Switch Illumination,
Rear Liftgate Switch Illumination,
Remote Cassette Illumination,
Overhead Console, Truck Body
Control Illurnination
15
Truck Body Module, Headlamp Relay
Front TurnSignals, Rear Turn
16
Signals, Trailer Turn Signals,
Back-up Lamps, BrakeTransmission
Shift Interlock Solenoid
FuseKircuit
Breaker
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
A
B
Usage
Front Wipers, Front Washer
Pump
VCM-lgn 3, VCM-Brake, Cruise
Stepper Motor Signal, ATC Module
Instrument Panel Radio: ATC
(Main Feed), 2000 Series (Standby)
PRNDUOdometer, TCC Enable and
PWM Solenoid, Shift A and Shift B
Solenoids, 3-2 Downshift Solenoid,
Instrument Panel Cluster, VCM
Module
Powr AdjustMirrors
Not Used
Rear Wiper, Rear Washer Pump
Not Used
(Circuit Breaker) Power Door Lock
Relay, 6-Way Power Seats
(Circuit Breaker) Power Windows
5-95
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located toward the rear
of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
Lift the hood and open the cover to gain access to this
fuse block.
A fuse puller is included in the underhood fuse block.
You will also find spare fuses.
5-96
Feed
AUX B
AUX A
Usage
Upfitter Battery Feed
Upfitter Accessory Feed
Relays
Usage
AIC Relay
Rear/Heat and Air Conditioning
(Rear Heat
and AIC)
Upfitter-ACCY Upfitter Accessory
Relay
Starter
Enable
Starter
Relay
A/C Enable
Air Conditioning
Relay
Headlamps
Headlamps
Relay
Fuel Pump
Fuel Pump
Relay
FuselCircuit
Breaker
UPFITTERBATT
UPFITTERACCY
used
Spare
Not
used
Spare
Not
Usage
Upfitter Battery Power Stud,
Trailer Wiring Harness
Upfitter Accessory
Relay
FuselCircuit
Breaker
Spare
ECM-1 B
HORN
AIC COMP
RR HTR/AC
ATC
FRT HVAC
ENG-I
IGN-E
ECM-I
Blank
RH HDLMP
LH Headlamp
Blank
Blank
Usage
Not used
Fuel Pump Relay and Motor, VCM,
Oil Pressure Switch/Sender
Horn Relay and Horn
Air Conditioning Enable Relay and
Compressor
Rear Heater and Air Conditioning
Active Transfer Case-L Van
Front Heater and Air Conditioning
Oxygen Sensors, Camshaft Position
Sensor, Mass Air Flow Sensor,
Evaporative Emission Canister
Vent Solenoid
Air Conditioning Enable Relay Coil
Fuel Injectors 1-6, Crankshaft
Position Sensot, VCM, Coil Driver
Module (EST), Ignition Coil
Not Used
Right Headlamp
Left Headlamp
Not Used
Not Used
5-97
Fuse/Circuit Usage
Breaker
DIODE-I
Air Conditioning
Blank
Not Used
Not Used
Blank
Blank
Not Used
LIGHTING
Courtesy
Fuse, Power
Adjust
Mirrors Fuse, Truck Body Control
Battery Fuse
Power Accessory Circuit Breaker,
BATT
Stop/Hazard Fuse, Auxiliary Power
Fuse, Cigarette Lighter Fuse, Radio
Battery Fuse
5-98
Fuse/Circuit
Breaker
IGN A
IGN B
ABS
Blank
RAP
HTD MIRI
RR DEFOG
Usage
Starter Relay, Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
Electronic Brake Control Module
Not Used
Radio Accessory, Power Windows
Rear Window Defogger,
Climate Control Head
Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to Part D: Recommended Nuids and Lubricants on page 6-32 for more information. See refrigerant
charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Engine Specifications
“Vortec” 4300 V6 MFI*
I
1-6-5-4-3-2
*Micro Fuel IniectionTire Pressures - See Loadina
Vehicle
Your
on
I
m a e 4-29.
Capacities and Specifications
I
Fuel
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
I
I
Capacities
27.0 gallons
5.0 quarts
I
101.8 L
4.7 L
5-99
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
I
Capacities
English
Application
1
Metric
Differential Fluid
Front Axle
Rear Axle
2.6 pints
3.5 pints
1.2 L
1.7 L
Refrigerant Type 134a
Front A/C
Front and Rear A/C
2.25 Ibs.
3.0 Ibs.
1.02 kg
1.36 kg
1
Ail capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual. recheck the fluid level after filling. See Parf D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page6-32 for
more information.
5-100
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it
was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM truck dealer.
Part
I Engine Oil Filter
kcase Positive
Number
PF47*
Valve
Ventilation (PCV)
I Spark Plugs
I Fuel Filter
CV769C*
41 -932*
GF481*
Wiper Blades (Front)
Type
Length
Trico 221 10158
18 inches (45.7 cm)
Wiper Blades (Rear)
Type
Length
Trico 22 154396
14 inches (35.5 cm)
5-101
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ............................... 6.2
Introduction ................................................... 6.2
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2
Maintenance Requirements .............................. 6-2
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6.4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule .................... 6.4
Selecting the Right Schedule ...........................6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ..............6.7
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ......6.18
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6.26
At Each Fuel Fill .......................................... 6-26
At Least Once a Month ................................. 6.26
At Least Twice a Year ................................... 6.26
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-27
Part C: Periodic Maintenance inspections .........6.30
Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................ 6.30
Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.30
Fuel System Inspection ..................................
6.30
Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6.30
Throttle System Inspection ............................ -6-31
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection .......................
-6-31
Brake System Inspection ................................ 6.31
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants ..........................................6.32
Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.34
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
IMPORTANTKEEP ENGINE C
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL ANDCHANGEAS
RECOMMENDED
~~
1
1
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer’s service department or another
qualified serIine center do these jobs.
Performing maintenance workon a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying
to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured.
Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the required
know-how and the proper tools and equipment
for thejob. If you have any doubt, have a
qualified technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-I 1.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
In this part are scheduled maintenance services which
are to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you to keep
your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t
know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported sewice
people will perform the work using GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
them. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
CertificationRire label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-29.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Selecting the Right Schedule
Short Trip/City Intervals
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules
is right for your vehicle. Here’s howto decide which
schedule to follow:
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first). Chassis
Lubrication (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Drive Axle Fluid Check.
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any
one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
Every 6,000Miles (IO 000 km): Tire Rotation.
e
Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km). This is
particularly important when outside temperatures
are below freezing.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air
Cleaner Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Front Wheel Bearing Repack (two-wheel drive only)
(or at eachbrake relining, whichever occurs first).
Automatic Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
e
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
Every 30,000Miles (50000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Fuel Filter Replacement.
e
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top
of your vehicle.
e
If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police,
taxi or other commercial application.
Every 50,000 Miles (83000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Transfer Case Fluid Change.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down sooner.
Every 100,000Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs
first). Engine Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenanceservices.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-5
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of
the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the
vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area
or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City
schedule for these conditions.
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (orevery 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Drive Axle Fluid Check. Tire Rotation.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under
highway conditions will cause engine oil to break
down slower.
Every 15,000 Miles (25000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Fuel Filter
Replacement. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Replacement.
Front Wheel Bearing Repack (two-wheel drive only)
(or at each brake relining, whichever occurs first).
Every 50,000 Miles (83000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Transfer Case Fluid Change.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Positive
Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve Inspection.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
Engine AccessoryDrive Belt Inspection.
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance
on the following pages.
6-6
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after IQ0,OOQmiles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-26
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-30.
Footnotes
t
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warrantyor limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, balljoints and kingpin
bushings, steering linkage, parking brake cable
guides and brake pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is duringtire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-3 1.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
6,000 Miles (IO 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
6-7
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
0
CI
0
0
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
6-8
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police ordelivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
18,000 Miles (30000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first).(See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
21,000Miles (35000 km)
B Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.
d Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
,
I
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
24,000Miles (40000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever OCCUrS first). An Emission Control Service.
u
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first): (See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
7,000Miles (45000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
B Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
30,000Miles (50 000 km)
0 Change enqine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever &curs first). An Emission- Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components(or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at eachbrake relining,
whichever occurs first).
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote t.)
B Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission Control
Service.
6-9
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where theoutside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any ofthese
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km),
U Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
6-10
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
D Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
tl Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
42,000Miles (70 000 km)
CI Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
c1 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000Miles (75 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
Cl Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
Cl Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
CI For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at eachbrake relining,
whichever occurs first).
U Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
U Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
6-1 1
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
0 Change transfer case fluid.
6-12
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
B Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #-)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at eachbrake relining,
whichever occurs first).
U Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under oneor more ofthese
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found intaxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle underany of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote f.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-13
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service,
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #,)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
c3 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
c1 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-14
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 For Two-Wheel-Drivevehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings(or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
CII Change automatictransmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly drivenunder one ormore of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequenttrailer towing.
- Uses such asfound in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving
in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
U Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
6-15
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
U Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
D Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
u Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
87,080 Miles (145 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0
0
0
0
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you donot use your vehicle under any
of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
6-16
Cl Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote f . )
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
U Rotate tires. See Tire inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
01 Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
El Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 3 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #.)
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
6-17
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
0 Change transfer case fluid.
Cl Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and
pressure cap.An Emission Control Service.
Cl Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled
Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part 5 : Owner Checks and Serviceson page 6-26
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6-30.
Footnotes
t
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agencyor the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warrantyor limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints and kingpin
bushings, steering linkage and transfer case shift linkage
parking brake cable guides and brake pedal springs.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-31.
6-18
7,500Miles (12 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
15,000Miles (25000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
Cl Lubricate chassis components (orevery 12 months,
whichever occurs first).(See footnote#).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constantvelocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
U Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found intaxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
6-19
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Checkconstant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
Ll Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
30,000Miles (50 000 km)
Cl Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
U Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Checkconstant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean andrepack
the front wheel bearings (or at eachbrake relining,
whichever occurs first).
6-20
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more
of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such asfound in taxi, police or delivery
service.
if youdo not use yourvehicle under any ofthese
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
Ll Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information.(See footnote +).
B Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote t).
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
C
I Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
Ll Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
D Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote#).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Checkconstant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under oneor more of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such asfound in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
50,000 Miles (83000 km)
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
U Change transfer case fluid.
6-21
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
CI Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote#).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote+).
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote#).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
6-22
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filterif the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more
of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any
of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote t).
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64for proper rotation patternand additional
information. (See footnote +).
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
CI Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control
Service.
U Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Check constant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle underany of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
6-23
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Checkconstant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check rear/front axle fluid level and addfluid as
needed. Checkconstant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles only: Clean and repack
the front wheel bearings (or at each brake relining,
whichever occurs first).
6-24
Q Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these
conditions:
- In heavy city traffic wherethe outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
-
Uses such asfound in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Replace fuel filter. An Emission Control Service.
(See footnote t).
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-64 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
U Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.
0 Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). (See footnote #).
0 Check readfront axle fluid level and add fluid as
needed. Checkconstant velocity joints and axle seals
for leaking.
0 Rotate tires. SeeTire Inspectionand Rotation on
page 5-64 for properrotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +).
U Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
See Engine Coolant on page 5-28 for what to use.
inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
U Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
Control Service.
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
U Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transmission fluid, change
both the fluid and filter.
0 Change transfer case fluid.
0 Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.
6-25
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-41 for
further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important foryou or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for
further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-28 for further details.
6-26
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
page 5-63 for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all yourbelts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare
working properly. Look for any other loose
or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep asafety belt system fromdoing its job, have it
repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Automatic Transmission Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle onpage 5-86.
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-25.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the
system and repair if needed.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then
try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a
Flat Tire on page 5-71.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-32.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all body door hinges, the body hood, fuel door
and rear compartment hinges, latches and locks
including interior glove box and console doors, hood
latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl and any moving seat hardware. Lubricate
the hood safety lever pivot and prop rod pivot. Part D
tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
6-27
Starte’ emvitnCI Check
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Co -. I System Check
- -
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-26 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-28
When you are do J this checl , he vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-26 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
IgnitionTransmission Lock Check
Whileparked,andwith the parking brake set, tw to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
0
0
The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P)Mechanism
C’ leck
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-29
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs
are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
6-30
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page2-30.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have high
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator
and cruise control cables.
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes
inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions
result in frequent braking.
Transfer Case and Front Axle
(All-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months, or at engine oil change intervals,
check front axle and transfer case and add lubricant
when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Check and have it repaired, if needed. Check vent
hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation.
6-31
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol
of the proper viscosity. To determine
the preferred viscosity for your
vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil
on page 5- 15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL
Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-28.
Usage
I
6-32
Fluid/Lubricant
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Power
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. US. 1052884, in
Canada 993294, or equivalent).
Automatic
Transmission
I
Transmission
Fluid.
DEXRON-Ill Automatic
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-PurposeLubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474,or equivalent).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901 242, or equivalent) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGl#2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Wheel
Bearings
Wheel bearing lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGl#2,
Category GC or GC-LB
(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,
in Canada 993037, orequivalent).
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
GM Optikleen Washer Solvent
Windshield
Washer Solvent or equivalent.
~~~~~
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada
88901242, or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGl #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
t
Hydraulic
Brake System
I
Usage
Front Axle
(GM Part No. U S . 1052271,
in Canada 10950849, or
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
378261, in Canada 10953455)
equivalent meeting
Transfer
Case
Part
0-TRAK II Fluid
No. U.S. 12378508
I
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U S . 12346293, in
Canada 992723, or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGl#2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood and
Door Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474, or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. US. 12345579,
in Canada 1095301 4, or
equivalent).
6-33
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
6-34
MaintenanceRecord (cont’d)
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
6-36
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information .....................
.7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... .7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone
(TTY)
Users
..........
.......7-4
Customer
Assistance
Offices ..........
.......7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ..........................................
.7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... .7-6
Courtesy Transportation .................................. .7-8
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................. .7-1P
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government .............................................. 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .................................... .7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-1I
7- 1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854(French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
Dealership nameand location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior
to filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
-.
I his program is avaiiabie in aii 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Online Owner Center
Customer AssistanceOff ices
The Owner Center at MyGMLink is a resource for your
GM ownership needs. You can find your specific
vehicle information all in one place.
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
The Owner Center allows you to:
Get e-mail service reminders.
Access information about your specific vehicle.
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual.
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to MyGMLink members.
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle visit www.MyGMLink.com.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1 -800-833-CHEV(2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
7-4
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1 [email protected] (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U S . Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices ( T Y s ) )
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central Americaand Caribbean
IslandsKountries (Except Puerto Rico
and U S . Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910 Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Phis program, available
to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers ana
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2003 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide you
over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problem cannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to
a nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free; however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
Roadside Basic Care provides:
0
Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs
(i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service,
glass repair, etc.)
7-6
Roadside Courtesy Care provides:
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined
previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation
will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided
by the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited
Warranty to eligible purchasers of 2003 Chevrolet
passenger cars and light duty trucks. (See your selling
dealer for details.)
Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2003 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services
must be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor;
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
0
Basic Careand Courtesy Care are not part of or included
in the coverageprovided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify or
discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Careat anytime.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies
that will provide you with quality and priority service.
When roadside services are required, our advisors will
explain any paymentobligations that may be incurred
for utilizing outside services.
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
7-7
Courtesy Transportation
Plan Ahead When Possible
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value
in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchaseAease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-e
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Warranty service can generally be completedwhile
you wait. However,if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending onthe circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one
of the following:
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rentai vehicle you obtained, at actuai cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible
for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as
a courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-9
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please contact
you dealer for specific information about availability.
All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-01 23in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Service Manuals
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A ON5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-11
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
Helm, Incorporated
P. 0. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
AccessoryPower Outlets .................................
3-16
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................ 3-48
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-Equipped
1-70
Vehicle .......................................................
AddingWasher Fluid .......................................
5-41
Additional Program Information .........................
7-10
Additives,Fuel .................................................
5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................
5-92
4-31
Add-on Equipment ..........................................
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ........ 3-40, 3-43
Air Bag
3-26
ReadinessLight ..........................................
AirBag System .............................................. 1-62
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-EquippedVehicle ......................
1-70
How DoesanAirBagRestrain?
....................
1-67
Servicing YourAir Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-69
1-67
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ....................
What Will You See After an Air Bag inflates? ...... 1-68
When ShouldanAir Bag Inflate? ................... 1-66
Where Are the Air Bags?
..............................
1-64
Air CleanedFiIter,
Engine
...
......................
5-24
7-5
All Overseas Locations ......................................
All-Wheel Drive ...............................................
5-52
All-WheelDrive(AWD)System
.........................
2-26
All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ............................
3-35
AluminumWheels ...........................................
5-88
AM ...............................................................
3-50
AM-FM
Radio
......................
................ 3-39
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-50
Anti-lockBrakeSystem .....................................
4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29
5-83
Appearance Care ............................................
5-86
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
ChemicalPaint Spotting ...............................
5-89
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-83
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-86
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-88
GMVehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 5-89
5-88
SheetMetalDamage ...................................
5-89
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
5-86
Weatherstrips ..............................................
3-17
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-38
Audio Systems
3-39
AM-FMRadio .............................................
3-50
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
3-50
Care of Your CDs ........................................
3-50
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
3-41
Radiowith CQ ............................................
3-46
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................
Setting the Time for Radios with HR and
3-38
MN Buttons .............................................
Setting the Time for Radios with the
SetButton ..............................................
3-38
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
3-47
3-50
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
1
Automatic HeadlampSystem .................. ......... 3-13
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ................................................
......... 5-25
Operation ......................................... ......... 2-23
Automatic Transmission Check ................ ......... 6-27
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check ...................................
......... 6-28
Bulb Replacement ...........................................
Front Turn Signal Lamps ..............................
Halogen Bulbs ............................................
Headlamps ............................
.........
Replacement Bulbs ..............................
Taillamps ....................................................
Buying New Tires ...................................
5-55
5-59
5-55
5-55
5-61
5-60
5-66
C
Backing Up ....................................................
Battery ..........................................................
Battery Replacement .........................................
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
.........................
1-11,
Bench Seat ............................................
Body Lubrication Service ..................................
Brake
Parking ......................................................
System Inspection .......................................
SystemWarning Light ..................................
Brake Adjustment ............................................
Brake Fluid ....................................................
Brake Pedal Travel .........................................
BrakeWear ...................................................
Brakes ..........................................................
Braking ...........................................................
Braking in Emergencies .....................................
Break-In, NewVehicle .....................................
BucketSeats,Rear .........................................
2
4-38
5-46
2-6
3-16
4-21
1-57
6-27
2-26
6-31
3-28
5-45
5-42
5-45
5-45
5-42
4-6
4-9
2-19
1-12
California Fuel ..................................................
5-6
Canada ........................................................... 7-5
Canadian Owners ................................................
ii
Canadian
Roadside
Assistance
............
....... 7-7
Cancelling the Sliding Door
2-12
Security Lock ..........................................
5-99
Capacities and Specifications ........................
Carbon
Monoxide
...............
..... 4-24, 4-31,
2-30
Care of
Safety Belts ....
.....................
5-86
Care ofYour
CD Player ..........
...., ............
..... 3-50
3-50
CDS ..........................................................
Cargo Vans ...........................................
1-41,1-48
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-27
..... 5-70
Chains, Tires .....................................
Charging
System
Light .......................
..... 3-27
Check
Engine Light ..............................
, ..... 3-30
GagesWarningLight ...................................
3-36
~
~
~
~
CheckingBrake Fluid ..................................
Checking Coolant ............................................
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Checking Your Restraint Systems ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child RestraintSystems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children(LATCHSystem) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH
System ................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position .......................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
OutsideSeat Position ...............................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ...................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Putthe Restraint ...........................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside ofYourVehicle
..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
UnderbodyMaintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses .......................
5-43
5-29
5-15
5-1 1
1-71
5-89
1-44
1-38
1-52
1-35
1-54
1-57
1-54
1-59
1-48
1-50
1-47
3-1 7
5-83
5-86
5-89
5-86
5-86
Climate Control System ...................................
3-18
Rear .......................................................... 3-21
Rear Air Conditioning System ........................
3-20
Rear Heating System ...................................
3-19
Compact Disc Messages ..................................
3-45
Compact Spare Tire ........................................
5-82
Composite Headlamps .....................................
5-56
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Net ............................................
2-45
Coolant
EngineTemperatureGage ............................
3-30
Heater,Engine ............................................
2-22
Cooling System ..............................................
5-33
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .........
. . . . . . 7-8
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone(TTY)Users ...............................
7-4
7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ...........................
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .....................
7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
7-5
Disabilities ................................................
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
7-11
CanadianGovernment ..............................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
7-10
United States Government .........................
Roadside Assistance Program .........................
7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
3
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ...................... 3-14
Defensive Driving .............................................
4-2
Defogging and Defrosting .................................
3-19
3-20
Directing the Airflow ........................................
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature ................. 3-49
Doing Your Own Service Work ...........................
5-3
Dome Lamps ..........................................
3-16
Door
2-8
Front Doors ...............................................
2-7
Locks ..........................................................
Power Door Locks .........................................
2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Rear Doors .................................................
2-13
Sliding SideDoor ........................................
2-10
Driver
Position, Safety Belt .....................................
1-18
Driver Information System ................................ 2-42
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-14
4-19
City ...........................................................
4-2
Defensive .....................................................
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
4-20
Freeway .....................................................
4-22
Hill and MountainRoads ..............................
In Rain and onWet Roads ...........................
4-16
Winter ........................................................ 4-24
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-39
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
4-24
~
4
~~~
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-18
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-18
Driving with a Trailer .......................................
4-37
E
Electrical System
Add-on Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamp Wiring .........................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options
.........
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs .................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Heater ............................................
Coolant TemperatureGage ...........................
Cooling System Inspection ............................
Cover ........................................................
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
FanNoise ..................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
5-92
5-93
5-92
5-92
5-92
3-33
5-24
5-46
3-30
5-28
2-22
3-30
6-30
5-20
5-14
2-30
5-39
5-15
5-31
2-21
Engine Coolant Level Check .............................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Oil Level Check ...................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Erasing [email protected] Buttons ..............................
ExceptCargoVans .................................
1-38,
Exit Lighting ...................................................
Express-Down Window ....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
6-26
5-18
6-26
3-15
2-37
1-47
3-15
2-17
1-34
3-12
F
FabricKarpet .................................................
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ......................................
Finding a Station ....................................
3-39,
Finish Care ....................................................
FinishDamage ...............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................
Flash-to-Pass .................
...........................
FlatTire ........................................................
FlatTire,Changing .........................................
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................
PowerSteering ...........................................
WindshieldWasher ......................................
FM ...............................................................
Following Distance ..........................................
5-83
5-24
3-41
5-87
5-88
3-50
3-7
5-70
5-71
5-25
5-40
5-41
3-50
4-38
Footnotes .....
................................ 6.7. 6-18
Front Axle . . . . . . . .
................................... 5-54
Front Doors ..................................................... 2-8
Fuel ...............................................................
5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel ..............................................
5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ....................
5-10
Filling YourTank ...........................................
5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries ..............................
5-7
Gage .........................................................
3-36
Gasoline Octane ...........................................
5-5
Gasoline Specifications ..................................
5-5
Low Warning Light .......................................
3-37
6-30
System Inspection .......................................
Fuel Regulator ................................................
2-21
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
5-93
Windshield Wiper .........................................
5-92
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light ..........................
Engine CoolantTemperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Voltmeter Gage ...........................................
Garage Door Opener .......................................
3-36
3-30
3-36
3-34
3-25
3-28
2-34
5
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................
Specifications ...............................................
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........
Glass Surfaces ...............................................
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ....................................................
5-5
5-5
2-36
5-85
7-5
H
Hatch ReI'ease .........................
........ 2-15
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
1-5
Head Restraints ...............................................
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ....................
3-7
Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-92
5-55
Headlamps ....................................................
Bulb Replacement ....................................
5-55
Front Turn Signal Lamps ..................
..... 5-59
Halogen Bulbs ............................
........ 5-55
4-22
Highway Hypnosis ...........................................
4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads ..................................
Hitches .......................................................... 4-36
HomeLink Transmitter, Programming .................. 2-35
[email protected] .................................... 2-34
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................
5-1 1
Release ..................................................... 5-1 1
Horn ............................................................... 3-5
6
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ........................................
5-34
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-37
How to Add Fluid ............................................
5-27
How to Check ........................................
5-25, 5-64
How to Check Lubricant ...................................
5-53
How to Check Power Steering
Fluid .................. 5-40
How to Use This Manual ......................................
ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
................... 1-18
Hydroplaning ..................................................
4-18
I
If No Steam Is Coming From
5-32
Your Engine ............................................
If Steam Is Coming FromYour Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
3-32
If the Light Is Flashing .....................................
If the Light Is On Steady .................................
3-32
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-28
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer .....................
4-32
If You're Caught in a Blizzard ...........................
4-26
2-19
Ignition Positions .............................................
6-29
Ignition Transmission Lock Check ......................
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-38
Inflation - Tire Pressure ...................................
5-64
Inspection
Brake System ............................................. 6-31
Engine Cooling System ................................
6-30
Inspection(cont.)
Exhaust
System
........................
....... 6-30
FuelSystem ...............................................
6-30
Part C - Periodic Maintenance .......................
6-30
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
BootandSeal ......................................... 6-30
Throttle System ...........................................
6-31
Installing a Garage Door Opener ....................... 2-40
Instrument Panel
3-24
Cluster .......................................................
Overview ..................................................
3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness Control .............. 3-15
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............................
5-93
Interior Lamps ................................................
3-15
5-85
Interior Plastic Components ..............................
Introduction
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Inspection ........ 6-31
Jump Starting .......................................
... 5-47
Key Lock Cylinders Service ..............................
KeylessEntrySystem .......................................
Keys ...............................................................
6-27
2-4
2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-12
Interior .......................................................
3-15
Lamps On Reminder .......................................
3-14
1-27
LapBelt ........................................................
Lap-Shoulder Belt ...................................
1-18, 1-29
LATCHSystem
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-52
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH
System ...........................
. 1-54
Latches, Seatback ............................................
1-6
Leather ......................................................... 5-85
Leaving Your Vehicle .......................................
2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running ..........................................
2-28
Light
Air Bag Readiness .......................................
3-26
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29
3-28
Brake System Warning .................................
Charging System .........................................
3-27
CheckGagesWarning .................................
3-36
LowFuelWarning .......................................
3-37
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
3-30
3-26
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
Security ..............................................
3-35
Service All-Wheel-Drive .........................
3-35
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-36
7
Loading Your Vehicle .......................................
4-29
Locks
Door ...........................................................
2-7
2-8
Front Doors ..................................................
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-10
2-8
Power Door ..................................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9
Long Trip/Highway Definition ..............................
6-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals ...............................
6-6
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ........ 6-18
4-13
Loss of Control ...............................................
3-37
Low Fuel Warning Light ...................................
2-44
Luggage Carrier ..............................................
Lumbar
1-3
Manual Controls ............................................
M
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-101
Maintenance Schedule
AtEach Fuel Fill .........................................
6-26
6-26
At Least Once a Month ................................
At Least Once a Year ..................................
6-27
At Least Twice a Year ..................................
6-26
BrakeSystem Inspection .............................. 6-31
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-30
ExhaustSystem Inspection ........................... 6-30
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-30
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
6-2
Introduction ..................................................
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance ..... 6-18
Maintenance Requirements .............................
6-2
Part A .Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B . Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-26
Part C . Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-30
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
6-32
Lubricants ...............................................
6-34
Part E . Maintenance Record ........................
Selecting the Right Schedule ..........................
6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance ............. 6-7
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Bootand Seal Inspection ..........................
6-30
6-31
Throttle System Inspection ............................
6-4
Using Your ...................................................
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing .....................
4-40
Making Turns .................................................
4-38
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................
3-30
Manual Lumbar Controls ....................................
1-3
Manual Seats ...................................................
1-2
2-16
ManualWindows ........................................
Mirrors
2-32
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................
Outside ConvexMirror .................................
2-33
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................
2-32
Outside Power Mirrors ..................................
2-32
vi
ModelReference ............................................
Matching Transmitter(s)to Your Vehicle ................. 2-5
Mexico, Central Americaand Caribbean
Islands/Countries (ExceptPuerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) ........................................ 7-5
7-4
MyGMLink.com ................................................
NewVehicle Break-In ......................................
2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-101
... 3-25
Odometer ............................................
... 4-1 1
Off-Road Recovery ................................
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Gage ............................................
3-34
OlderChildren,Restraints ................................
1-35
Online Owner Center ........................................
7-4
Operation Tips ................................................
3-22
Other Warning Devices ......................................
3-5
Outlet Adjustment ............................................
3-22
Outside
Convex Mirror .............................................
2-33
Manual Mirrors ............................................
2-32
PowerMirrors ............................................. 2-32
OverheadConsole ..........................................
2-39
Owners,Canadian ...............................................
ii
Owner’s Information ........................................
7-12
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into .............................
........ 2-27
Shifting Out of .........................
............ 2-29
Parking
2-26
Brake .....................................................
2-30
Over Things That Burn .................................
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
6-29
Park (P) Mechanism Check ...........................
4-39 -39
Parking on Hills ........................................
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................... 6-26
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ............ 6-30
Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 6-32
6-34
Part E - Maintenance Record .............................
4-12, 4-38
Passing .................................................
[email protected]
2-18
Payload ......................................................... 4-31
7-8
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................
3-43
Playing a Compact Disc ...................................
Playing the Radio ...................................
3-39, 3-41
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................
3-16
2-8
Door Locks ..................................................
5-92
Electrical System .........................................
1-3
Seat ............................................................
Steering Fluid .............................................
5-40
Windows ....................................................
2-17
9
Power Steering ................................................
4-9
.................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-35
Q
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ......... 1-17
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................
............ 5-30
Radios .......................................
............ 3-38
AM-FM .......................................
........ 3-39
3-50
Care ofYour CD Player ...........................
Care ofYour CDs ....................................
3-50
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-41
3-46
Rear Seat Audio ..........................................
Setting the Time for Radios with HR and
MN Buttons .........................................
3-38
Setting the Time for Radios with the
Set Buttons .............................
........ 3-38
Theft-Deterrent ........................
........ 3-47
Understanding Reception ..........................
3-50
Reading Lamps .............................................. 2-40
Rear Air Conditioning System ...........................
3-20
Rear Axle ......................................................
5-53
Rear Climate Control System ............................
3-21
Rear Doors ....................................................
2-13
Rear Heating System ......................................
3-19
10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ......................
1-32
Rear Seat Audio .............................................
3-46
Rear Seat Operation .........................................
1-7
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-29
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-29
Rear Window Defoqqer
-- .................................... 3-21
Rearview Mirrors .............................................
2-32
Reclining Seatbacks ..........................................
1-4
Recreational Vehicle Towing .............................
4-29
Reinstalling the Engine Cover ...........................
5-23
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System,Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Engine Cover .............................
5-20
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ..................................................
5-76
Removing the Rear Seats ..................................
1-7
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-72
Removing the Wheel Covers ............................
5-75
5-61
Replacement Bulbs .........................................
Replacing Brake System Parts ..........................
5-46
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ..............................................
1-71
Replacing the Rear Seats ..................................
1-9
Reporting Safety Defects
7-11
Canadian Government ..................................
7-11
General Motors ...........................................
United States Government ............................
7-10
Reprogramming a Single [email protected] Button ....... 2-37
2-37
Resetting Defaults ...........................................
Restraint
System
Check
.....................
... 6-26
Checking Your Restraint
Systems
.....
... 1-71
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................
1-71
Restraint Systems
Checking ....................................................
1-71
Replacing Parts ...........................................
1-71
1-5
Restraints, Head ...............................................
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ......................
2-20
Right Front PassengerPosition, Safety Belts ......... 1-27
Roadside
Assistance Program .......................................
7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get
It Out ................... 4-28
Running Your Engine While YouAre Parked ....... 2-31
Safety Belt
Reminder
Light
...
..................................
3-26
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
5-86
Center Passenger Position ............................
1-27
1-18
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-18
Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts ........ 1-17
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
1-32
ChildrenandSmall Adults .........................
1-29
RearSeatPassengers .................................
1-27
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Extender ....................................
1-34
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-26
1-13
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .......................
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-36
...
Safety Warnings and Symbols ..............................
III
SealedBeamHeadlamp ..................................
5-55
Seatback Latches .............................................
1-6
Seats
..........
...........,
........ 1-11
Bench
Seat
Bucket Seats,
Rear ...................
........ 1-12
Head Restraints ............................................
1-5
Manual ........................................................
1-2
Manual Lumbar .............................................
1-3
PowerSeat ..................................................
1-3
1-7
Rear Seat Operation ......................................
Reclining Seatbacks ......................................
1-4
Seatback Latches ..........................................
1-6
Securing a Child Restraint
1-57
Center Seat Position ....................................
Designedfor the LATCHSystem ................... 1-54
Rear Outside Seat Position ...........................
1-54
Right Front Seat Position ..............................
1-59
Security Light .................................................
3-35
Selecting the Right Schedule, Maintenance .......... 6-5
Selecting the Fan Speed ..................................
3-20
Service ...........................................................
5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
All-Wheel-Drive Light ....................................
3-35
11
Service (cont.)
Doing Your Own Work ...................................
5-3
Engine Soon Light .......................................
3-30
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-1 1
Sewice Bulletins .............................................
7-12
Service Engine Soon Light in the United States
or Check Engine Light
in Canada ..................................................
3-30
7-1 1
Service Manuals .............................................
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ............ 1-69
Setting Preset Stations ............................
3-39, 3-42
Setting the Temperature ...................................
3-20
Setting the Time
Radios with HR and MN Buttons ................... 3-38
Radios with the Set Button ...........................
3-38
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble) .................. 3-40, 3-43
5-88
Sheet Metal Damage .......................................
Shifting Into Park (P) .......................................
2-27
Shifting Out of Park(P) ...................................
2-29
Short Trip/City Definition ....................................
6-5
Short TripKity Intervals .....................................
6-5
Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance .........
6-7
Shoulder
Belt Height Adjuster ...............
..... 1-20
Skidding ........................................
......... 4-13
Sliding Door Security Lock ...............................
2-1 1
Sliding Side Door ............................................ 2-10
4-18
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips .......................
Spare Tire Check ............................................
6-27
12
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems .....................
Specifications, Capacities .................................
Speedometer ..................................................
Starter Switch Check .......................................
Starting Your Engine .......................................
Steering ..........................................................
Steering in Emergencies ..................................
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ..............................
Steering Tips ...................................................
Storage Areas ................................................
Convenience Net .........................................
Luggage Carrier ..........................................
Overhead Console .......................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...............
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunglasses Storage Compartment .....................
5-84
5-99
3-25
6-28
2-21
4-9
4-10
Taillamps .......................................................
Theft.Deterrent.Radio
.....................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ...................................
[email protected]
Throttle System Inspection ...........................
Tilt Wheel ........................................................
Tire Inflation Check .........................................
5-60
3-47
2-18
2-18
6-31
3-5
6-26
6-30
4-9
2-38
2-45
2-44
2-39
5-81
4-28
2-17
2-44
Tires .....................................................
5.63. 5-88
Buying New Tires ........................................
5-66
5-70
Chains .......................................................
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-71
Compact Spare Tire .....................................
5-82
5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat .......................................
5-64
Inflation - Tire Pressure ...............................
5-64
Inspection and Rotation ................................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-67
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-69
Wheel Replacement .....................................
5-69
......................
5-66
WhenIt Is Time for New Tires
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22
Top of the Instrument Panel .............................
5-85
1-48
Top Strap ......................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ...............................
1-50
Torque
Lock
.................................
....... 2-29
...
....... 4-35
Total
Weight
on
Your
Vehicle’s
Tires
2-25
Tow/Haul Mode Button .....................................
Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 3-36
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .....................................
4-29
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-31
4-29
Your Vehicle ...............................................
Trailer Brakes .................................................
4-36
Trailer Wiring Harness .....................................
4-41
TraileringPackage .......................................... 4-31
TransferCase ................................................
5-52
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ...........................................
5-25
Transmission Operation. Automatic .................... 2-23
Transmission. Transaxle. Transfer Case Unit
7-11
Repair Manual ............................................
7-9
Transportation Options ......................................
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25
Turnand Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-6
Turn Signals WhenTowing a Trailer .................. 4-38
U
Underbody Flushing Service .................
..... 6-29
Underhood Fuse Block ....................
..... 5-96
....
..... 3-50
Understanding Radio
Reception
UniformTire Quality Grading .........................
5-67
7-4
United States ...................................................
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature
After a Power Loss ......................................
3-49
5-70
Used Replacement Wheels ..............................
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-84
Using [email protected] ...........................................
2-37
v
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
4-29
Loading ......................................................
Symbols .........................................................
iv
13
Vehicle Identification
Number(VIN) .............................................
Service Parts identification Label ...................
Vehicle Storage ..............................................
Vinyl .............................................................
Visor Vanity Mirror ..........................................
Visors ...........................................................
Voltmeter Gage ..............................................
5-91
5-91
5-47
5-85
2-17
2-1 7
3-28
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ...............................
3-4
..................................
3-5
OtherWarning Devices
...
Safety and Symbols .........................................
111
Vehicle Damage ..............................................
iv
Washing Your Vehicle ..................
............ 5-86
Weatherstrip Lubrication ...................
........ 6-27
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-33
4-35
Weight of the Trailer Tongue .............................
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................
5-17
What to Do with Used Oil ................................
5-19
What to Use ..........................
5-28, 5-40, 5-41, 5-53
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-69
Replacement ....................
....
......... 5-69
14
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-16
When to Change Engine Oil .............................
5-18
When to Check ..............................................
5-64
When to Check and Change ............................
5-25
When to Check Lubricant .................................
5-53
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................ 5-40
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking ona Hill .........................................
4-40
1-47
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
Why Safety Belts Work ....................................
1-14
Windows ....................................................... 2-16
Manual ......................................................
2-16
2-17
Power ........................................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...........................
5-87
Windshield Washer ...........................................
3-8
Fluid ..........................................................
5-41
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-26
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ......................................
5-62
5-92
Fuses ........................................................
Windshield Wipers ............................................
3-8
4-24
Winter Driving ............................................
....
............................. 6-27
Wiper
Blade
Check
Y
four Vehicle and the Environment
....... .. 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement